mirror of
https://github.com/samba-team/samba.git
synced 2025-01-12 09:18:10 +03:00
syncing docs with HEAD
This commit is contained in:
parent
d74382ccfe
commit
d8fe70c3b4
Binary file not shown.
Binary file not shown.
@ -31,3 +31,58 @@
|
||||
<!-- Misc -->
|
||||
<!ENTITY samba.pub.cvshost 'pserver.samba.org'>
|
||||
|
||||
<!ENTITY stdarg.debuglevel '
|
||||
<varlistentry>
|
||||
<term>-d|--debug=debuglevel</term>
|
||||
<listitem>
|
||||
<para><replaceable>debuglevel</replaceable> is an integer
|
||||
from 0 to 10. The default value if this parameter is
|
||||
not specified is zero.</para>
|
||||
|
||||
<para>The higher this value, the more detail will be
|
||||
logged to the log files about the activities of the
|
||||
server. At level 0, only critical errors and serious
|
||||
warnings will be logged. Level 1 is a reasonable level for
|
||||
day to day running - it generates a small amount of
|
||||
information about operations carried out.</para>
|
||||
|
||||
<para>Levels above 1 will generate considerable
|
||||
amounts of log data, and should only be used when
|
||||
investigating a problem. Levels above 3 are designed for
|
||||
use only by developers and generate HUGE amounts of log
|
||||
data, most of which is extremely cryptic.</para>
|
||||
|
||||
<para>Note that specifying this parameter here will
|
||||
override the <ulink url="smb.conf.5.html#loglevel">log
|
||||
level</ulink> parameter in the <ulink url="smb.conf.5.html">
|
||||
<filename>smb.conf(5)</filename></ulink> file.</para>
|
||||
</listitem>
|
||||
</varlistentry>'>
|
||||
|
||||
<!ENTITY stdarg.help '
|
||||
<varlistentry>
|
||||
<term>-h|--help</term>
|
||||
<listitem><para>Print a summary of command line options.
|
||||
</para></listitem>
|
||||
</varlistentry>'>
|
||||
|
||||
<!ENTITY stdarg.configfile '
|
||||
<varlistentry>
|
||||
<term>-s <configuration file></term>
|
||||
<listitem><para>The file specified contains the
|
||||
configuration details required by the server. The
|
||||
information in this file includes server-specific
|
||||
information such as what printcap file to use, as well
|
||||
as descriptions of all the services that the server is
|
||||
to provide. See <ulink url="smb.conf.5.html"><filename>
|
||||
smb.conf(5)</filename></ulink> for more information.
|
||||
The default configuration file name is determined at
|
||||
compile time.</para></listitem>
|
||||
</varlistentry>'>
|
||||
|
||||
<!ENTITY stdarg.version '
|
||||
<varlistentry>
|
||||
<term>-v</term>
|
||||
<listitem><para>Prints the version number for
|
||||
<command>smbd</command>.</para></listitem>
|
||||
</varlistentry>'>
|
||||
|
@ -39,6 +39,15 @@
|
||||
<title>OPTIONS</title>
|
||||
|
||||
<variablelist>
|
||||
<varlistentry>
|
||||
<term>-r</term>
|
||||
<listitem><para>Controls whether <command>findsmb</command> takes
|
||||
bugs in Windows95 into account when trying to find a Netbios name
|
||||
registered of the remote machine. This option is disabled by default
|
||||
because it is specific to Windows 95 and Windows 95 machines only.
|
||||
If set, <ulink url="nmblookup.1.html"><command>nmblookup</command></ulink>
|
||||
will be called with <constant>-B<constant> option.</para></listitem>
|
||||
</varlistentry>
|
||||
<varlistentry>
|
||||
<term>subnet broadcast address</term>
|
||||
<listitem><para>Without this option, <command>findsmb
|
||||
@ -66,15 +75,17 @@
|
||||
not show any information about the operating system or server
|
||||
version.</para>
|
||||
|
||||
<para>The command must be run on a system without <ulink
|
||||
<para>The command with <constant>-r</constant> option
|
||||
must be run on a system without <ulink
|
||||
url="nmbd.8.html"><command>nmbd</command></ulink> running.
|
||||
If <command>nmbd</command> is running on the system, you will
|
||||
only get the IP address and the DNS name of the machine. To
|
||||
get proper responses from Windows 95 and Windows 98 machines,
|
||||
the command must be run as root. </para>
|
||||
the command must be run as root and with <constant>-r</constant>
|
||||
option on a machine without <command>nmbd</command> running.</para>
|
||||
|
||||
<para>For example, running <command>findsmb</command> on a machine
|
||||
without <command>nmbd</command> running would yield output similar
|
||||
<para>For example, running <command>findsmb</command> without
|
||||
<constant>-r</constant> option set would yield output similar
|
||||
to the following</para>
|
||||
|
||||
<screen><computeroutput>
|
||||
|
@ -14,7 +14,7 @@
|
||||
<address><email>jelmer@samba.org</email></address>
|
||||
</affiliation>
|
||||
</author>
|
||||
<pubdate>$Id: Diagnosis.sgml,v 1.1.2.3 2002/11/22 00:32:23 tpot Exp $</pubdate>
|
||||
<pubdate>Wed Jan 15</pubdate>
|
||||
</chapterinfo>
|
||||
|
||||
<title>Diagnosing your samba server</title>
|
||||
|
@ -2,12 +2,12 @@
|
||||
|
||||
<chapterinfo>
|
||||
<author>
|
||||
<firstname>Gerald (Jerry)></firstname><surname>Carter</surname>
|
||||
<firstname>Gerald (Jerry)</firstname><surname>Carter</surname>
|
||||
<affiliation>
|
||||
<orgname>Samba Team</orgname>
|
||||
<address><email>jerry@samba.org</email></address>
|
||||
</affiliation>
|
||||
<firstname>Olivier (lem)></firstname><surname>Lemaire</surname>
|
||||
<firstname>Olivier (lem)</firstname><surname>Lemaire</surname>
|
||||
<affiliation>
|
||||
<orgname>IDEALX</orgname>
|
||||
<address><email>olem@IDEALX.org</email></address>
|
||||
@ -47,7 +47,7 @@ Two additional Samba resources which may prove to be helpful are
|
||||
</para>
|
||||
|
||||
<itemizedlist>
|
||||
<listitem><para>The <ulink url="http://www.unav.es/cti/ldap-smb/ldap-smb-2_2-howto.html">Samba-PDC-LDAP-HOWTO</ulink>
|
||||
<listitem><para>The <ulink url="http://www.unav.es/cti/ldap-smb/ldap-smb-3-howto.html">Samba-PDC-LDAP-HOWTO</ulink>
|
||||
maintained by Ignacio Coupeau.</para></listitem>
|
||||
|
||||
<listitem><para>The NT migration scripts from <ulink url="http://samba.idealx.org/">IDEALX</ulink> that are
|
||||
|
@ -54,6 +54,14 @@ identifier:mysql port - defaults to 3306
|
||||
identifier:table - Name of the table containing users
|
||||
</programlisting></para>
|
||||
|
||||
<para>
|
||||
<emphasis>
|
||||
WARNING: since the password for the mysql user is stored in the
|
||||
smb.conf file, you should make the the smb.conf file
|
||||
readable only to the user that runs samba. This is considered a security
|
||||
bug and will be fixed soon.</emphasis>
|
||||
</para>
|
||||
|
||||
<para>Names of the columns in this table(I've added column types those columns should have first):</para>
|
||||
|
||||
<para><programlisting>
|
||||
|
@ -22,7 +22,6 @@
|
||||
<!ENTITY Portability SYSTEM "Portability.sgml">
|
||||
<!ENTITY Other-Clients SYSTEM "Other-Clients.sgml">
|
||||
<!ENTITY ADS-HOWTO SYSTEM "ADS-HOWTO.sgml">
|
||||
<!ENTITY oplocks SYSTEM "oplocks.sgml">
|
||||
<!ENTITY pdb-mysql SYSTEM "pdb_mysql.sgml">
|
||||
<!ENTITY pdb-xml SYSTEM "pdb_xml.sgml">
|
||||
<!ENTITY VFS SYSTEM "VFS.sgml">
|
||||
@ -43,7 +42,7 @@
|
||||
<title>Abstract</title>
|
||||
|
||||
<para>
|
||||
<emphasis>Last Update</emphasis> : $Date: 2002/11/22 00:32:23 $
|
||||
<emphasis>Last Update</emphasis> : $Date: 2003/01/15 22:29:21 $
|
||||
</para>
|
||||
|
||||
<para>
|
||||
@ -80,7 +79,6 @@ PLEASE read this.</para>
|
||||
</partintro>
|
||||
&UNIX-INSTALL;
|
||||
&BROWSING;
|
||||
&oplocks;
|
||||
&BROWSING-Quick;
|
||||
&ENCRYPTION;
|
||||
</part>
|
||||
|
@ -10,8 +10,8 @@ REL="HOME"
|
||||
TITLE="Samba FAQ"
|
||||
HREF="samba-faq.html"><LINK
|
||||
REL="PREVIOUS"
|
||||
TITLE="Compiling and installing Samba on a Unix host"
|
||||
HREF="install.html"><LINK
|
||||
TITLE="Configuration problems"
|
||||
HREF="config.html"><LINK
|
||||
REL="NEXT"
|
||||
TITLE="Common errors"
|
||||
HREF="errors.html"></HEAD
|
||||
@ -42,7 +42,7 @@ WIDTH="10%"
|
||||
ALIGN="left"
|
||||
VALIGN="bottom"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
HREF="install.html"
|
||||
HREF="config.html"
|
||||
ACCESSKEY="P"
|
||||
>Prev</A
|
||||
></TD
|
||||
@ -71,15 +71,15 @@ CLASS="CHAPTER"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="CLIENTAPP"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>Chapter 3. Specific client application problems</H1
|
||||
>Chapter 4. Specific client application problems</H1
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN170"
|
||||
NAME="AEN175"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>3.1. MS Office Setup reports "Cannot change properties of '\MSOFFICE\SETUP.INI'"</H1
|
||||
>4.1. MS Office Setup reports "Cannot change properties of '\MSOFFICE\SETUP.INI'"</H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>When installing MS Office on a Samba drive for which you have admin
|
||||
user permissions, ie. admin users = username, you will find the
|
||||
@ -98,9 +98,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN175"
|
||||
NAME="AEN180"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>3.2. How to use a Samba share as an administrative share for MS Office, etc.</H1
|
||||
>4.2. How to use a Samba share as an administrative share for MS Office, etc.</H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Microsoft Office products can be installed as an administrative installation
|
||||
from which the application can either be run off the administratively installed
|
||||
@ -160,9 +160,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN190"
|
||||
NAME="AEN195"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>3.3. Microsoft Access database opening errors</H1
|
||||
>4.3. Microsoft Access database opening errors</H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Here are some notes on running MS-Access on a Samba drive from <A
|
||||
HREF="stefank@esi.com.au"
|
||||
@ -210,7 +210,7 @@ WIDTH="33%"
|
||||
ALIGN="left"
|
||||
VALIGN="top"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
HREF="install.html"
|
||||
HREF="config.html"
|
||||
ACCESSKEY="P"
|
||||
>Prev</A
|
||||
></TD
|
||||
@ -238,7 +238,7 @@ ACCESSKEY="N"
|
||||
WIDTH="33%"
|
||||
ALIGN="left"
|
||||
VALIGN="top"
|
||||
>Compiling and installing Samba on a Unix host</TD
|
||||
>Configuration problems</TD
|
||||
><TD
|
||||
WIDTH="34%"
|
||||
ALIGN="center"
|
||||
|
@ -71,15 +71,15 @@ CLASS="CHAPTER"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="ERRORS"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>Chapter 4. Common errors</H1
|
||||
>Chapter 5. Common errors</H1
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN201"
|
||||
NAME="AEN206"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>4.1. Not listening for calling name</H1
|
||||
>5.1. Not listening for calling name</H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
><PRE
|
||||
CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING"
|
||||
@ -103,9 +103,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN208"
|
||||
NAME="AEN213"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>4.2. System Error 1240</H1
|
||||
>5.2. System Error 1240</H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>System error 1240 means that the client is refusing to talk
|
||||
to a non-encrypting server. Microsoft changed WinNT in service
|
||||
@ -139,9 +139,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN215"
|
||||
NAME="AEN220"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>4.3. smbclient ignores -N !</H1
|
||||
>5.3. smbclient ignores -N !</H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
><SPAN
|
||||
CLASS="QUOTE"
|
||||
@ -174,9 +174,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN224"
|
||||
NAME="AEN229"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>4.4. The data on the CD-Drive I've shared seems to be corrupted!</H1
|
||||
>5.4. The data on the CD-Drive I've shared seems to be corrupted!</H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Some OSes (notably Linux) default to auto detection of file type on
|
||||
cdroms and do cr/lf translation. This is a very bad idea when use with
|
||||
@ -190,9 +190,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN228"
|
||||
NAME="AEN233"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>4.5. Why can users access home directories of other users?</H1
|
||||
>5.5. Why can users access home directories of other users?</H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
><SPAN
|
||||
CLASS="QUOTE"
|
||||
@ -243,6 +243,17 @@ CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING"
|
||||
to the definition of the [homes] share, as recommended in
|
||||
the smb.conf man page.</P
|
||||
></DIV
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN246"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>5.6. Until a few minutes after samba has started, clients get the error "Domain Controller Unavailable"</H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>A domain controller has to announce on the network who it is. This usually takes a while.</P
|
||||
></DIV
|
||||
></DIV
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="NAVFOOTER"
|
||||
|
@ -13,8 +13,8 @@ REL="PREVIOUS"
|
||||
TITLE="General Information"
|
||||
HREF="general.html"><LINK
|
||||
REL="NEXT"
|
||||
TITLE="Specific client application problems"
|
||||
HREF="clientapp.html"></HEAD
|
||||
TITLE="Configuration problems"
|
||||
HREF="config.html"></HEAD
|
||||
><BODY
|
||||
CLASS="CHAPTER"
|
||||
BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF"
|
||||
@ -56,7 +56,7 @@ WIDTH="10%"
|
||||
ALIGN="right"
|
||||
VALIGN="bottom"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
HREF="clientapp.html"
|
||||
HREF="config.html"
|
||||
ACCESSKEY="N"
|
||||
>Next</A
|
||||
></TD
|
||||
@ -496,7 +496,7 @@ WIDTH="33%"
|
||||
ALIGN="right"
|
||||
VALIGN="top"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
HREF="clientapp.html"
|
||||
HREF="config.html"
|
||||
ACCESSKEY="N"
|
||||
>Next</A
|
||||
></TD
|
||||
@ -516,7 +516,7 @@ VALIGN="top"
|
||||
WIDTH="33%"
|
||||
ALIGN="right"
|
||||
VALIGN="top"
|
||||
>Specific client application problems</TD
|
||||
>Configuration problems</TD
|
||||
></TR
|
||||
></TABLE
|
||||
></DIV
|
||||
|
@ -156,118 +156,142 @@ HREF="install.html#AEN155"
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>3. <A
|
||||
HREF="config.html"
|
||||
>Configuration problems</A
|
||||
></DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><DL
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>3.1. <A
|
||||
HREF="config.html#AEN170"
|
||||
>I have set 'force user' and samba still makes 'root' the owner of all the files I touch!</A
|
||||
></DT
|
||||
></DL
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>4. <A
|
||||
HREF="clientapp.html"
|
||||
>Specific client application problems</A
|
||||
></DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><DL
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>3.1. <A
|
||||
HREF="clientapp.html#AEN170"
|
||||
>4.1. <A
|
||||
HREF="clientapp.html#AEN175"
|
||||
>MS Office Setup reports "Cannot change properties of '\MSOFFICE\SETUP.INI'"</A
|
||||
></DT
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>3.2. <A
|
||||
HREF="clientapp.html#AEN175"
|
||||
>4.2. <A
|
||||
HREF="clientapp.html#AEN180"
|
||||
>How to use a Samba share as an administrative share for MS Office, etc.</A
|
||||
></DT
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>3.3. <A
|
||||
HREF="clientapp.html#AEN190"
|
||||
>4.3. <A
|
||||
HREF="clientapp.html#AEN195"
|
||||
>Microsoft Access database opening errors</A
|
||||
></DT
|
||||
></DL
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>4. <A
|
||||
>5. <A
|
||||
HREF="errors.html"
|
||||
>Common errors</A
|
||||
></DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><DL
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>4.1. <A
|
||||
HREF="errors.html#AEN201"
|
||||
>5.1. <A
|
||||
HREF="errors.html#AEN206"
|
||||
>Not listening for calling name</A
|
||||
></DT
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>4.2. <A
|
||||
HREF="errors.html#AEN208"
|
||||
>5.2. <A
|
||||
HREF="errors.html#AEN213"
|
||||
>System Error 1240</A
|
||||
></DT
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>4.3. <A
|
||||
HREF="errors.html#AEN215"
|
||||
>5.3. <A
|
||||
HREF="errors.html#AEN220"
|
||||
>smbclient ignores -N !</A
|
||||
></DT
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>4.4. <A
|
||||
HREF="errors.html#AEN224"
|
||||
>5.4. <A
|
||||
HREF="errors.html#AEN229"
|
||||
>The data on the CD-Drive I've shared seems to be corrupted!</A
|
||||
></DT
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>4.5. <A
|
||||
HREF="errors.html#AEN228"
|
||||
>5.5. <A
|
||||
HREF="errors.html#AEN233"
|
||||
>Why can users access home directories of other users?</A
|
||||
></DT
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>5.6. <A
|
||||
HREF="errors.html#AEN246"
|
||||
>Until a few minutes after samba has started, clients get the error "Domain Controller Unavailable"</A
|
||||
></DT
|
||||
></DL
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>5. <A
|
||||
>6. <A
|
||||
HREF="features.html"
|
||||
>Features</A
|
||||
></DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><DL
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>5.1. <A
|
||||
HREF="features.html#AEN243"
|
||||
>6.1. <A
|
||||
HREF="features.html#AEN251"
|
||||
>How can I prevent my samba server from being used to distribute the Nimda worm?</A
|
||||
></DT
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>5.2. <A
|
||||
HREF="features.html#AEN257"
|
||||
>6.2. <A
|
||||
HREF="features.html#AEN265"
|
||||
>How can I use samba as a fax server?</A
|
||||
></DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><DL
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>5.2.1. <A
|
||||
HREF="features.html#AEN268"
|
||||
>6.2.1. <A
|
||||
HREF="features.html#AEN276"
|
||||
>Tools for printing faxes</A
|
||||
></DT
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>5.2.2. <A
|
||||
HREF="features.html#AEN278"
|
||||
>6.2.2. <A
|
||||
HREF="features.html#AEN286"
|
||||
>Making the fax-server</A
|
||||
></DT
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>5.2.3. <A
|
||||
HREF="features.html#AEN294"
|
||||
>6.2.3. <A
|
||||
HREF="features.html#AEN302"
|
||||
>Installing the client drivers</A
|
||||
></DT
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>5.2.4. <A
|
||||
HREF="features.html#AEN308"
|
||||
>6.2.4. <A
|
||||
HREF="features.html#AEN316"
|
||||
>Example smb.conf</A
|
||||
></DT
|
||||
></DL
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>5.3. <A
|
||||
HREF="features.html#AEN312"
|
||||
>6.3. <A
|
||||
HREF="features.html#AEN320"
|
||||
>Samba doesn't work well together with DHCP!</A
|
||||
></DT
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>5.4. <A
|
||||
HREF="features.html#AEN325"
|
||||
>6.4. <A
|
||||
HREF="features.html#AEN333"
|
||||
>How can I assign NetBIOS names to clients with DHCP?</A
|
||||
></DT
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>5.5. <A
|
||||
HREF="features.html#AEN332"
|
||||
>6.5. <A
|
||||
HREF="features.html#AEN340"
|
||||
>How do I convert between unix and dos text formats?</A
|
||||
></DT
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>6.6. <A
|
||||
HREF="features.html#AEN345"
|
||||
>Does samba have wins replication support?</A
|
||||
></DT
|
||||
></DL
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
></DL
|
||||
|
@ -1,656 +0,0 @@
|
||||
<HTML
|
||||
><HEAD
|
||||
><TITLE
|
||||
>LanMan and NT Password Encryption in Samba 2.x</TITLE
|
||||
><META
|
||||
NAME="GENERATOR"
|
||||
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.57"></HEAD
|
||||
><BODY
|
||||
CLASS="ARTICLE"
|
||||
BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF"
|
||||
TEXT="#000000"
|
||||
LINK="#0000FF"
|
||||
VLINK="#840084"
|
||||
ALINK="#0000FF"
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="ARTICLE"
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="TITLEPAGE"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="TITLE"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="PWENCRYPT"
|
||||
>LanMan and NT Password Encryption in Samba 2.x</A
|
||||
></H1
|
||||
><HR></DIV
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN3"
|
||||
>Introduction</A
|
||||
></H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>With the development of LanManager and Windows NT
|
||||
compatible password encryption for Samba, it is now able
|
||||
to validate user connections in exactly the same way as
|
||||
a LanManager or Windows NT server.</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>This document describes how the SMB password encryption
|
||||
algorithm works and what issues there are in choosing whether
|
||||
you want to use it. You should read it carefully, especially
|
||||
the part about security and the "PROS and CONS" section.</P
|
||||
></DIV
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><HR><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN7"
|
||||
>How does it work?</A
|
||||
></H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>LanManager encryption is somewhat similar to UNIX
|
||||
password encryption. The server uses a file containing a
|
||||
hashed value of a user's password. This is created by taking
|
||||
the user's plaintext password, capitalising it, and either
|
||||
truncating to 14 bytes or padding to 14 bytes with null bytes.
|
||||
This 14 byte value is used as two 56 bit DES keys to encrypt
|
||||
a 'magic' eight byte value, forming a 16 byte value which is
|
||||
stored by the server and client. Let this value be known as
|
||||
the "hashed password".</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Windows NT encryption is a higher quality mechanism,
|
||||
consisting of doing an MD4 hash on a Unicode version of the user's
|
||||
password. This also produces a 16 byte hash value that is
|
||||
non-reversible.</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>When a client (LanManager, Windows for WorkGroups, Windows
|
||||
95 or Windows NT) wishes to mount a Samba drive (or use a Samba
|
||||
resource), it first requests a connection and negotiates the
|
||||
protocol that the client and server will use. In the reply to this
|
||||
request the Samba server generates and appends an 8 byte, random
|
||||
value - this is stored in the Samba server after the reply is sent
|
||||
and is known as the "challenge". The challenge is different for
|
||||
every client connection.</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>The client then uses the hashed password (16 byte values
|
||||
described above), appended with 5 null bytes, as three 56 bit
|
||||
DES keys, each of which is used to encrypt the challenge 8 byte
|
||||
value, forming a 24 byte value known as the "response".</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>In the SMB call SMBsessionsetupX (when user level security
|
||||
is selected) or the call SMBtconX (when share level security is
|
||||
selected), the 24 byte response is returned by the client to the
|
||||
Samba server. For Windows NT protocol levels the above calculation
|
||||
is done on both hashes of the user's password and both responses are
|
||||
returned in the SMB call, giving two 24 byte values.</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>The Samba server then reproduces the above calculation, using
|
||||
its own stored value of the 16 byte hashed password (read from the
|
||||
<TT
|
||||
CLASS="FILENAME"
|
||||
>smbpasswd</TT
|
||||
> file - described later) and the challenge
|
||||
value that it kept from the negotiate protocol reply. It then checks
|
||||
to see if the 24 byte value it calculates matches the 24 byte value
|
||||
returned to it from the client.</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>If these values match exactly, then the client knew the
|
||||
correct password (or the 16 byte hashed value - see security note
|
||||
below) and is thus allowed access. If not, then the client did not
|
||||
know the correct password and is denied access.</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Note that the Samba server never knows or stores the cleartext
|
||||
of the user's password - just the 16 byte hashed values derived from
|
||||
it. Also note that the cleartext password or 16 byte hashed values
|
||||
are never transmitted over the network - thus increasing security.</P
|
||||
></DIV
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><HR><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN18"
|
||||
>Important Notes About Security</A
|
||||
></H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>The unix and SMB password encryption techniques seem similar
|
||||
on the surface. This similarity is, however, only skin deep. The unix
|
||||
scheme typically sends clear text passwords over the network when
|
||||
logging in. This is bad. The SMB encryption scheme never sends the
|
||||
cleartext password over the network but it does store the 16 byte
|
||||
hashed values on disk. This is also bad. Why? Because the 16 byte hashed
|
||||
values are a "password equivalent". You cannot derive the user's
|
||||
password from them, but they could potentially be used in a modified
|
||||
client to gain access to a server. This would require considerable
|
||||
technical knowledge on behalf of the attacker but is perfectly possible.
|
||||
You should thus treat the smbpasswd file as though it contained the
|
||||
cleartext passwords of all your users. Its contents must be kept
|
||||
secret, and the file should be protected accordingly.</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Ideally we would like a password scheme which neither requires
|
||||
plain text passwords on the net or on disk. Unfortunately this
|
||||
is not available as Samba is stuck with being compatible with
|
||||
other SMB systems (WinNT, WfWg, Win95 etc). </P
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="WARNING"
|
||||
><P
|
||||
></P
|
||||
><TABLE
|
||||
CLASS="WARNING"
|
||||
BORDER="1"
|
||||
WIDTH="100%"
|
||||
><TR
|
||||
><TD
|
||||
ALIGN="CENTER"
|
||||
><B
|
||||
>Warning</B
|
||||
></TD
|
||||
></TR
|
||||
><TR
|
||||
><TD
|
||||
ALIGN="LEFT"
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Note that Windows NT 4.0 Service pack 3 changed the
|
||||
default for permissible authentication so that plaintext
|
||||
passwords are <I
|
||||
CLASS="EMPHASIS"
|
||||
>never</I
|
||||
> sent over the wire.
|
||||
The solution to this is either to switch to encrypted passwords
|
||||
with Samba or edit the Windows NT registry to re-enable plaintext
|
||||
passwords. See the document WinNT.txt for details on how to do
|
||||
this.</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Other Microsoft operating systems which also exhibit
|
||||
this behavior includes</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
></P
|
||||
><UL
|
||||
><LI
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>MS DOS Network client 3.0 with
|
||||
the basic network redirector installed</P
|
||||
></LI
|
||||
><LI
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Windows 95 with the network redirector
|
||||
update installed</P
|
||||
></LI
|
||||
><LI
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Windows 98 [se]</P
|
||||
></LI
|
||||
><LI
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Windows 2000</P
|
||||
></LI
|
||||
></UL
|
||||
><P
|
||||
><I
|
||||
CLASS="EMPHASIS"
|
||||
>Note :</I
|
||||
>All current release of
|
||||
Microsoft SMB/CIFS clients support authentication via the
|
||||
SMB Challenge/Response mechanism described here. Enabling
|
||||
clear text authentication does not disable the ability
|
||||
of the client to participate in encrypted authentication.</P
|
||||
></TD
|
||||
></TR
|
||||
></TABLE
|
||||
></DIV
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><HR><H2
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN37"
|
||||
>Advantages of SMB Encryption</A
|
||||
></H2
|
||||
><P
|
||||
></P
|
||||
><UL
|
||||
><LI
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>plain text passwords are not passed across
|
||||
the network. Someone using a network sniffer cannot just
|
||||
record passwords going to the SMB server.</P
|
||||
></LI
|
||||
><LI
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>WinNT doesn't like talking to a server
|
||||
that isn't using SMB encrypted passwords. It will refuse
|
||||
to browse the server if the server is also in user level
|
||||
security mode. It will insist on prompting the user for the
|
||||
password on each connection, which is very annoying. The
|
||||
only things you can do to stop this is to use SMB encryption.
|
||||
</P
|
||||
></LI
|
||||
></UL
|
||||
></DIV
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><HR><H2
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN44"
|
||||
>Advantages of non-encrypted passwords</A
|
||||
></H2
|
||||
><P
|
||||
></P
|
||||
><UL
|
||||
><LI
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>plain text passwords are not kept
|
||||
on disk. </P
|
||||
></LI
|
||||
><LI
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>uses same password file as other unix
|
||||
services such as login and ftp</P
|
||||
></LI
|
||||
><LI
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>you are probably already using other
|
||||
services (such as telnet and ftp) which send plain text
|
||||
passwords over the net, so sending them for SMB isn't
|
||||
such a big deal.</P
|
||||
></LI
|
||||
></UL
|
||||
></DIV
|
||||
></DIV
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><HR><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN53"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="SMBPASSWDFILEFORMAT"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>The smbpasswd file</A
|
||||
></H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>In order for Samba to participate in the above protocol
|
||||
it must be able to look up the 16 byte hashed values given a user name.
|
||||
Unfortunately, as the UNIX password value is also a one way hash
|
||||
function (ie. it is impossible to retrieve the cleartext of the user's
|
||||
password given the UNIX hash of it), a separate password file
|
||||
containing this 16 byte value must be kept. To minimise problems with
|
||||
these two password files, getting out of sync, the UNIX <TT
|
||||
CLASS="FILENAME"
|
||||
> /etc/passwd</TT
|
||||
> and the <TT
|
||||
CLASS="FILENAME"
|
||||
>smbpasswd</TT
|
||||
> file,
|
||||
a utility, <B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>mksmbpasswd.sh</B
|
||||
>, is provided to generate
|
||||
a smbpasswd file from a UNIX <TT
|
||||
CLASS="FILENAME"
|
||||
>/etc/passwd</TT
|
||||
> file.
|
||||
</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>To generate the smbpasswd file from your <TT
|
||||
CLASS="FILENAME"
|
||||
>/etc/passwd
|
||||
</TT
|
||||
> file use the following command :</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
><TT
|
||||
CLASS="PROMPT"
|
||||
>$ </TT
|
||||
><TT
|
||||
CLASS="USERINPUT"
|
||||
><B
|
||||
>cat /etc/passwd | mksmbpasswd.sh
|
||||
> /usr/local/samba/private/smbpasswd</B
|
||||
></TT
|
||||
></P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>If you are running on a system that uses NIS, use</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
><TT
|
||||
CLASS="PROMPT"
|
||||
>$ </TT
|
||||
><TT
|
||||
CLASS="USERINPUT"
|
||||
><B
|
||||
>ypcat passwd | mksmbpasswd.sh
|
||||
> /usr/local/samba/private/smbpasswd</B
|
||||
></TT
|
||||
></P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>The <B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>mksmbpasswd.sh</B
|
||||
> program is found in
|
||||
the Samba source directory. By default, the smbpasswd file is
|
||||
stored in :</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
><TT
|
||||
CLASS="FILENAME"
|
||||
>/usr/local/samba/private/smbpasswd</TT
|
||||
></P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>The owner of the <TT
|
||||
CLASS="FILENAME"
|
||||
>/usr/local/samba/private/</TT
|
||||
>
|
||||
directory should be set to root, and the permissions on it should
|
||||
be set to 0500 (<B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>chmod 500 /usr/local/samba/private</B
|
||||
>).
|
||||
</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Likewise, the smbpasswd file inside the private directory should
|
||||
be owned by root and the permissions on is should be set to 0600
|
||||
(<B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>chmod 600 smbpasswd</B
|
||||
>).</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>The format of the smbpasswd file is (The line has been
|
||||
wrapped here. It should appear as one entry per line in
|
||||
your smbpasswd file.)</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
><PRE
|
||||
CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING"
|
||||
>username:uid:XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX:XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX:
|
||||
[Account type]:LCT-<last-change-time>:Long name
|
||||
</PRE
|
||||
></P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Although only the <TT
|
||||
CLASS="REPLACEABLE"
|
||||
><I
|
||||
>username</I
|
||||
></TT
|
||||
>,
|
||||
<TT
|
||||
CLASS="REPLACEABLE"
|
||||
><I
|
||||
>uid</I
|
||||
></TT
|
||||
>, <TT
|
||||
CLASS="REPLACEABLE"
|
||||
><I
|
||||
> XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX</I
|
||||
></TT
|
||||
>,
|
||||
[<TT
|
||||
CLASS="REPLACEABLE"
|
||||
><I
|
||||
>Account type</I
|
||||
></TT
|
||||
>] and <TT
|
||||
CLASS="REPLACEABLE"
|
||||
><I
|
||||
> last-change-time</I
|
||||
></TT
|
||||
> sections are significant
|
||||
and are looked at in the Samba code.</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>It is <I
|
||||
CLASS="EMPHASIS"
|
||||
>VITALLY</I
|
||||
> important that there by 32
|
||||
'X' characters between the two ':' characters in the XXX sections -
|
||||
the smbpasswd and Samba code will fail to validate any entries that
|
||||
do not have 32 characters between ':' characters. The first XXX
|
||||
section is for the Lanman password hash, the second is for the
|
||||
Windows NT version.</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>When the password file is created all users have password entries
|
||||
consisting of 32 'X' characters. By default this disallows any access
|
||||
as this user. When a user has a password set, the 'X' characters change
|
||||
to 32 ascii hexadecimal digits (0-9, A-F). These are an ascii
|
||||
representation of the 16 byte hashed value of a user's password.</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>To set a user to have no password (not recommended), edit the file
|
||||
using vi, and replace the first 11 characters with the ascii text
|
||||
<TT
|
||||
CLASS="CONSTANT"
|
||||
>"NO PASSWORD"</TT
|
||||
> (minus the quotes).</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>For example, to clear the password for user bob, his smbpasswd file
|
||||
entry would look like :</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
><PRE
|
||||
CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING"
|
||||
> bob:100:NO PASSWORDXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX:XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX:[U ]:LCT-00000000:Bob's full name:/bobhome:/bobshell
|
||||
</PRE
|
||||
></P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>If you are allowing users to use the smbpasswd command to set
|
||||
their own passwords, you may want to give users NO PASSWORD initially
|
||||
so they do not have to enter a previous password when changing to their
|
||||
new password (not recommended). In order for you to allow this the
|
||||
<B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>smbpasswd</B
|
||||
> program must be able to connect to the
|
||||
<B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>smbd</B
|
||||
> daemon as that user with no password. Enable this
|
||||
by adding the line :</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
><B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>null passwords = yes</B
|
||||
></P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>to the [global] section of the smb.conf file (this is why
|
||||
the above scenario is not recommended). Preferably, allocate your
|
||||
users a default password to begin with, so you do not have
|
||||
to enable this on your server.</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
><I
|
||||
CLASS="EMPHASIS"
|
||||
>Note : </I
|
||||
>This file should be protected very
|
||||
carefully. Anyone with access to this file can (with enough knowledge of
|
||||
the protocols) gain access to your SMB server. The file is thus more
|
||||
sensitive than a normal unix <TT
|
||||
CLASS="FILENAME"
|
||||
>/etc/passwd</TT
|
||||
> file.</P
|
||||
></DIV
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><HR><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN105"
|
||||
>The smbpasswd Command</A
|
||||
></H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>The smbpasswd command maintains the two 32 byte password fields
|
||||
in the smbpasswd file. If you wish to make it similar to the unix
|
||||
<B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>passwd</B
|
||||
> or <B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>yppasswd</B
|
||||
> programs,
|
||||
install it in <TT
|
||||
CLASS="FILENAME"
|
||||
>/usr/local/samba/bin/</TT
|
||||
> (or your
|
||||
main Samba binary directory).</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Note that as of Samba 1.9.18p4 this program <I
|
||||
CLASS="EMPHASIS"
|
||||
>MUST NOT
|
||||
BE INSTALLED</I
|
||||
> setuid root (the new <B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>smbpasswd</B
|
||||
>
|
||||
code enforces this restriction so it cannot be run this way by
|
||||
accident).</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
><B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>smbpasswd</B
|
||||
> now works in a client-server mode
|
||||
where it contacts the local smbd to change the user's password on its
|
||||
behalf. This has enormous benefits - as follows.</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
></P
|
||||
><UL
|
||||
><LI
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>smbpasswd no longer has to be setuid root -
|
||||
an enormous range of potential security problems is
|
||||
eliminated.</P
|
||||
></LI
|
||||
><LI
|
||||
><P
|
||||
><B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>smbpasswd</B
|
||||
> now has the capability
|
||||
to change passwords on Windows NT servers (this only works when
|
||||
the request is sent to the NT Primary Domain Controller if you
|
||||
are changing an NT Domain user's password).</P
|
||||
></LI
|
||||
></UL
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>To run smbpasswd as a normal user just type :</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
><TT
|
||||
CLASS="PROMPT"
|
||||
>$ </TT
|
||||
><TT
|
||||
CLASS="USERINPUT"
|
||||
><B
|
||||
>smbpasswd</B
|
||||
></TT
|
||||
></P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
><TT
|
||||
CLASS="PROMPT"
|
||||
>Old SMB password: </TT
|
||||
><TT
|
||||
CLASS="USERINPUT"
|
||||
><B
|
||||
><type old value here -
|
||||
or hit return if there was no old password></B
|
||||
></TT
|
||||
></P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
><TT
|
||||
CLASS="PROMPT"
|
||||
>New SMB Password: </TT
|
||||
><TT
|
||||
CLASS="USERINPUT"
|
||||
><B
|
||||
><type new value>
|
||||
</B
|
||||
></TT
|
||||
></P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
><TT
|
||||
CLASS="PROMPT"
|
||||
>Repeat New SMB Password: </TT
|
||||
><TT
|
||||
CLASS="USERINPUT"
|
||||
><B
|
||||
><re-type new value
|
||||
</B
|
||||
></TT
|
||||
></P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>If the old value does not match the current value stored for
|
||||
that user, or the two new values do not match each other, then the
|
||||
password will not be changed.</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>If invoked by an ordinary user it will only allow the user
|
||||
to change his or her own Samba password.</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>If run by the root user smbpasswd may take an optional
|
||||
argument, specifying the user name whose SMB password you wish to
|
||||
change. Note that when run as root smbpasswd does not prompt for
|
||||
or check the old password value, thus allowing root to set passwords
|
||||
for users who have forgotten their passwords.</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
><B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>smbpasswd</B
|
||||
> is designed to work in the same way
|
||||
and be familiar to UNIX users who use the <B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>passwd</B
|
||||
> or
|
||||
<B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>yppasswd</B
|
||||
> commands.</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>For more details on using <B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>smbpasswd</B
|
||||
> refer
|
||||
to the man page which will always be the definitive reference.</P
|
||||
></DIV
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><HR><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN144"
|
||||
>Setting up Samba to support LanManager Encryption</A
|
||||
></H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>This is a very brief description on how to setup samba to
|
||||
support password encryption. </P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
></P
|
||||
><OL
|
||||
TYPE="1"
|
||||
><LI
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>compile and install samba as usual</P
|
||||
></LI
|
||||
><LI
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>enable encrypted passwords in <TT
|
||||
CLASS="FILENAME"
|
||||
> smb.conf</TT
|
||||
> by adding the line <B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>encrypt
|
||||
passwords = yes</B
|
||||
> in the [global] section</P
|
||||
></LI
|
||||
><LI
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>create the initial <TT
|
||||
CLASS="FILENAME"
|
||||
>smbpasswd</TT
|
||||
>
|
||||
password file in the place you specified in the Makefile
|
||||
(--prefix=<dir>). See the notes under the <A
|
||||
HREF="#SMBPASSWDFILEFORMAT"
|
||||
>The smbpasswd File</A
|
||||
>
|
||||
section earlier in the document for details.</P
|
||||
></LI
|
||||
></OL
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Note that you can test things using smbclient.</P
|
||||
></DIV
|
||||
></DIV
|
||||
></BODY
|
||||
></HTML
|
||||
>
|
@ -1,783 +0,0 @@
|
||||
<HTML
|
||||
><HEAD
|
||||
><TITLE
|
||||
>UNIX Permission Bits and Windows NT Access Control Lists</TITLE
|
||||
><META
|
||||
NAME="GENERATOR"
|
||||
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.57"></HEAD
|
||||
><BODY
|
||||
CLASS="ARTICLE"
|
||||
BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF"
|
||||
TEXT="#000000"
|
||||
LINK="#0000FF"
|
||||
VLINK="#840084"
|
||||
ALINK="#0000FF"
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="ARTICLE"
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="TITLEPAGE"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="TITLE"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="UNIX-PERMISSIONS"
|
||||
>UNIX Permission Bits and Windows NT Access Control Lists</A
|
||||
></H1
|
||||
><HR></DIV
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN3"
|
||||
>Viewing and changing UNIX permissions using the NT
|
||||
security dialogs</A
|
||||
></H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>New in the Samba 2.0.4 release is the ability for Windows
|
||||
NT clients to use their native security settings dialog box to
|
||||
view and modify the underlying UNIX permissions.</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Note that this ability is careful not to compromise
|
||||
the security of the UNIX host Samba is running on, and
|
||||
still obeys all the file permission rules that a Samba
|
||||
administrator can set.</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>In Samba 2.0.4 and above the default value of the
|
||||
parameter <A
|
||||
HREF="smb.conf.5.html#NTACLSUPPORT"
|
||||
TARGET="_top"
|
||||
><TT
|
||||
CLASS="PARAMETER"
|
||||
><I
|
||||
> nt acl support</I
|
||||
></TT
|
||||
></A
|
||||
> has been changed from
|
||||
<TT
|
||||
CLASS="CONSTANT"
|
||||
>false</TT
|
||||
> to <TT
|
||||
CLASS="CONSTANT"
|
||||
>true</TT
|
||||
>, so
|
||||
manipulation of permissions is turned on by default.</P
|
||||
></DIV
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><HR><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN12"
|
||||
>How to view file security on a Samba share</A
|
||||
></H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>From an NT 4.0 client, single-click with the right
|
||||
mouse button on any file or directory in a Samba mounted
|
||||
drive letter or UNC path. When the menu pops-up, click
|
||||
on the <I
|
||||
CLASS="EMPHASIS"
|
||||
>Properties</I
|
||||
> entry at the bottom of
|
||||
the menu. This brings up the normal file properties dialog
|
||||
box, but with Samba 2.0.4 this will have a new tab along the top
|
||||
marked <I
|
||||
CLASS="EMPHASIS"
|
||||
>Security</I
|
||||
>. Click on this tab and you
|
||||
will see three buttons, <I
|
||||
CLASS="EMPHASIS"
|
||||
>Permissions</I
|
||||
>,
|
||||
<I
|
||||
CLASS="EMPHASIS"
|
||||
>Auditing</I
|
||||
>, and <I
|
||||
CLASS="EMPHASIS"
|
||||
>Ownership</I
|
||||
>.
|
||||
The <I
|
||||
CLASS="EMPHASIS"
|
||||
>Auditing</I
|
||||
> button will cause either
|
||||
an error message <SPAN
|
||||
CLASS="ERRORNAME"
|
||||
>A requested privilege is not held
|
||||
by the client</SPAN
|
||||
> to appear if the user is not the
|
||||
NT Administrator, or a dialog which is intended to allow an
|
||||
Administrator to add auditing requirements to a file if the
|
||||
user is logged on as the NT Administrator. This dialog is
|
||||
non-functional with a Samba share at this time, as the only
|
||||
useful button, the <B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>Add</B
|
||||
> button will not currently
|
||||
allow a list of users to be seen.</P
|
||||
></DIV
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><HR><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN23"
|
||||
>Viewing file ownership</A
|
||||
></H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Clicking on the <B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>"Ownership"</B
|
||||
> button
|
||||
brings up a dialog box telling you who owns the given file. The
|
||||
owner name will be of the form :</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
><B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>"SERVER\user (Long name)"</B
|
||||
></P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Where <TT
|
||||
CLASS="REPLACEABLE"
|
||||
><I
|
||||
>SERVER</I
|
||||
></TT
|
||||
> is the NetBIOS name of
|
||||
the Samba server, <TT
|
||||
CLASS="REPLACEABLE"
|
||||
><I
|
||||
>user</I
|
||||
></TT
|
||||
> is the user name of
|
||||
the UNIX user who owns the file, and <TT
|
||||
CLASS="REPLACEABLE"
|
||||
><I
|
||||
>(Long name)</I
|
||||
></TT
|
||||
>
|
||||
is the descriptive string identifying the user (normally found in the
|
||||
GECOS field of the UNIX password database). Click on the <B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>Close
|
||||
</B
|
||||
> button to remove this dialog.</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>If the parameter <TT
|
||||
CLASS="PARAMETER"
|
||||
><I
|
||||
>nt acl support</I
|
||||
></TT
|
||||
>
|
||||
is set to <TT
|
||||
CLASS="CONSTANT"
|
||||
>false</TT
|
||||
> then the file owner will
|
||||
be shown as the NT user <B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>"Everyone"</B
|
||||
>.</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>The <B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>Take Ownership</B
|
||||
> button will not allow
|
||||
you to change the ownership of this file to yourself (clicking on
|
||||
it will display a dialog box complaining that the user you are
|
||||
currently logged onto the NT client cannot be found). The reason
|
||||
for this is that changing the ownership of a file is a privileged
|
||||
operation in UNIX, available only to the <I
|
||||
CLASS="EMPHASIS"
|
||||
>root</I
|
||||
>
|
||||
user. As clicking on this button causes NT to attempt to change
|
||||
the ownership of a file to the current user logged into the NT
|
||||
client this will not work with Samba at this time.</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>There is an NT chown command that will work with Samba
|
||||
and allow a user with Administrator privilege connected
|
||||
to a Samba 2.0.4 server as root to change the ownership of
|
||||
files on both a local NTFS filesystem or remote mounted NTFS
|
||||
or Samba drive. This is available as part of the <I
|
||||
CLASS="EMPHASIS"
|
||||
>Seclib
|
||||
</I
|
||||
> NT security library written by Jeremy Allison of
|
||||
the Samba Team, available from the main Samba ftp site.</P
|
||||
></DIV
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><HR><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN43"
|
||||
>Viewing file or directory permissions</A
|
||||
></H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>The third button is the <B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>"Permissions"</B
|
||||
>
|
||||
button. Clicking on this brings up a dialog box that shows both
|
||||
the permissions and the UNIX owner of the file or directory.
|
||||
The owner is displayed in the form :</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
><B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>"SERVER\user (Long name)"</B
|
||||
></P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Where <TT
|
||||
CLASS="REPLACEABLE"
|
||||
><I
|
||||
>SERVER</I
|
||||
></TT
|
||||
> is the NetBIOS name of
|
||||
the Samba server, <TT
|
||||
CLASS="REPLACEABLE"
|
||||
><I
|
||||
>user</I
|
||||
></TT
|
||||
> is the user name of
|
||||
the UNIX user who owns the file, and <TT
|
||||
CLASS="REPLACEABLE"
|
||||
><I
|
||||
>(Long name)</I
|
||||
></TT
|
||||
>
|
||||
is the descriptive string identifying the user (normally found in the
|
||||
GECOS field of the UNIX password database).</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>If the parameter <TT
|
||||
CLASS="PARAMETER"
|
||||
><I
|
||||
>nt acl support</I
|
||||
></TT
|
||||
>
|
||||
is set to <TT
|
||||
CLASS="CONSTANT"
|
||||
>false</TT
|
||||
> then the file owner will
|
||||
be shown as the NT user <B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>"Everyone"</B
|
||||
> and the
|
||||
permissions will be shown as NT "Full Control".</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>The permissions field is displayed differently for files
|
||||
and directories, so I'll describe the way file permissions
|
||||
are displayed first.</P
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><HR><H2
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN58"
|
||||
>File Permissions</A
|
||||
></H2
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>The standard UNIX user/group/world triple and
|
||||
the corresponding "read", "write", "execute" permissions
|
||||
triples are mapped by Samba into a three element NT ACL
|
||||
with the 'r', 'w', and 'x' bits mapped into the corresponding
|
||||
NT permissions. The UNIX world permissions are mapped into
|
||||
the global NT group <B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>Everyone</B
|
||||
>, followed
|
||||
by the list of permissions allowed for UNIX world. The UNIX
|
||||
owner and group permissions are displayed as an NT
|
||||
<B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>user</B
|
||||
> icon and an NT <B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>local
|
||||
group</B
|
||||
> icon respectively followed by the list
|
||||
of permissions allowed for the UNIX user and group.</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>As many UNIX permission sets don't map into common
|
||||
NT names such as <B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>"read"</B
|
||||
>, <B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
> "change"</B
|
||||
> or <B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>"full control"</B
|
||||
> then
|
||||
usually the permissions will be prefixed by the words <B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
> "Special Access"</B
|
||||
> in the NT display list.</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>But what happens if the file has no permissions allowed
|
||||
for a particular UNIX user group or world component ? In order
|
||||
to allow "no permissions" to be seen and modified then Samba
|
||||
overloads the NT <B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>"Take Ownership"</B
|
||||
> ACL attribute
|
||||
(which has no meaning in UNIX) and reports a component with
|
||||
no permissions as having the NT <B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>"O"</B
|
||||
> bit set.
|
||||
This was chosen of course to make it look like a zero, meaning
|
||||
zero permissions. More details on the decision behind this will
|
||||
be given below.</P
|
||||
></DIV
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><HR><H2
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN72"
|
||||
>Directory Permissions</A
|
||||
></H2
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Directories on an NT NTFS file system have two
|
||||
different sets of permissions. The first set of permissions
|
||||
is the ACL set on the directory itself, this is usually displayed
|
||||
in the first set of parentheses in the normal <B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>"RW"</B
|
||||
>
|
||||
NT style. This first set of permissions is created by Samba in
|
||||
exactly the same way as normal file permissions are, described
|
||||
above, and is displayed in the same way.</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>The second set of directory permissions has no real meaning
|
||||
in the UNIX permissions world and represents the <B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
> "inherited"</B
|
||||
> permissions that any file created within
|
||||
this directory would inherit.</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Samba synthesises these inherited permissions for NT by
|
||||
returning as an NT ACL the UNIX permission mode that a new file
|
||||
created by Samba on this share would receive.</P
|
||||
></DIV
|
||||
></DIV
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><HR><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN79"
|
||||
>Modifying file or directory permissions</A
|
||||
></H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Modifying file and directory permissions is as simple
|
||||
as changing the displayed permissions in the dialog box, and
|
||||
clicking the <B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>OK</B
|
||||
> button. However, there are
|
||||
limitations that a user needs to be aware of, and also interactions
|
||||
with the standard Samba permission masks and mapping of DOS
|
||||
attributes that need to also be taken into account.</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>If the parameter <TT
|
||||
CLASS="PARAMETER"
|
||||
><I
|
||||
>nt acl support</I
|
||||
></TT
|
||||
>
|
||||
is set to <TT
|
||||
CLASS="CONSTANT"
|
||||
>false</TT
|
||||
> then any attempt to set
|
||||
security permissions will fail with an <B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>"Access Denied"
|
||||
</B
|
||||
> message.</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>The first thing to note is that the <B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>"Add"</B
|
||||
>
|
||||
button will not return a list of users in Samba 2.0.4 (it will give
|
||||
an error message of <B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>"The remote procedure call failed
|
||||
and did not execute"</B
|
||||
>). This means that you can only
|
||||
manipulate the current user/group/world permissions listed in
|
||||
the dialog box. This actually works quite well as these are the
|
||||
only permissions that UNIX actually has.</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>If a permission triple (either user, group, or world)
|
||||
is removed from the list of permissions in the NT dialog box,
|
||||
then when the <B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>"OK"</B
|
||||
> button is pressed it will
|
||||
be applied as "no permissions" on the UNIX side. If you then
|
||||
view the permissions again the "no permissions" entry will appear
|
||||
as the NT <B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>"O"</B
|
||||
> flag, as described above. This
|
||||
allows you to add permissions back to a file or directory once
|
||||
you have removed them from a triple component.</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>As UNIX supports only the "r", "w" and "x" bits of
|
||||
an NT ACL then if other NT security attributes such as "Delete
|
||||
access" are selected then they will be ignored when applied on
|
||||
the Samba server.</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>When setting permissions on a directory the second
|
||||
set of permissions (in the second set of parentheses) is
|
||||
by default applied to all files within that directory. If this
|
||||
is not what you want you must uncheck the <B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>"Replace
|
||||
permissions on existing files"</B
|
||||
> checkbox in the NT
|
||||
dialog before clicking <B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>"OK"</B
|
||||
>.</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>If you wish to remove all permissions from a
|
||||
user/group/world component then you may either highlight the
|
||||
component and click the <B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>"Remove"</B
|
||||
> button,
|
||||
or set the component to only have the special <B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>"Take
|
||||
Ownership"</B
|
||||
> permission (displayed as <B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>"O"
|
||||
</B
|
||||
>) highlighted.</P
|
||||
></DIV
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><HR><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN101"
|
||||
>Interaction with the standard Samba create mask
|
||||
parameters</A
|
||||
></H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Note that with Samba 2.0.5 there are four new parameters
|
||||
to control this interaction. These are :</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
><TT
|
||||
CLASS="PARAMETER"
|
||||
><I
|
||||
>security mask</I
|
||||
></TT
|
||||
></P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
><TT
|
||||
CLASS="PARAMETER"
|
||||
><I
|
||||
>force security mode</I
|
||||
></TT
|
||||
></P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
><TT
|
||||
CLASS="PARAMETER"
|
||||
><I
|
||||
>directory security mask</I
|
||||
></TT
|
||||
></P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
><TT
|
||||
CLASS="PARAMETER"
|
||||
><I
|
||||
>force directory security mode</I
|
||||
></TT
|
||||
></P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Once a user clicks <B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>"OK"</B
|
||||
> to apply the
|
||||
permissions Samba maps the given permissions into a user/group/world
|
||||
r/w/x triple set, and then will check the changed permissions for a
|
||||
file against the bits set in the <A
|
||||
HREF="smb.conf.5.html#SECURITYMASK"
|
||||
TARGET="_top"
|
||||
>
|
||||
<TT
|
||||
CLASS="PARAMETER"
|
||||
><I
|
||||
>security mask</I
|
||||
></TT
|
||||
></A
|
||||
> parameter. Any bits that
|
||||
were changed that are not set to '1' in this parameter are left alone
|
||||
in the file permissions.</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Essentially, zero bits in the <TT
|
||||
CLASS="PARAMETER"
|
||||
><I
|
||||
>security mask</I
|
||||
></TT
|
||||
>
|
||||
mask may be treated as a set of bits the user is <I
|
||||
CLASS="EMPHASIS"
|
||||
>not</I
|
||||
>
|
||||
allowed to change, and one bits are those the user is allowed to change.
|
||||
</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>If not set explicitly this parameter is set to the same value as
|
||||
the <A
|
||||
HREF="smb.conf.5.html#CREATEMASK"
|
||||
TARGET="_top"
|
||||
><TT
|
||||
CLASS="PARAMETER"
|
||||
><I
|
||||
>create mask
|
||||
</I
|
||||
></TT
|
||||
></A
|
||||
> parameter to provide compatibility with Samba 2.0.4
|
||||
where this permission change facility was introduced. To allow a user to
|
||||
modify all the user/group/world permissions on a file, set this parameter
|
||||
to 0777.</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Next Samba checks the changed permissions for a file against
|
||||
the bits set in the <A
|
||||
HREF="smb.conf.5.html#FORCESECURITYMODE"
|
||||
TARGET="_top"
|
||||
> <TT
|
||||
CLASS="PARAMETER"
|
||||
><I
|
||||
>force security mode</I
|
||||
></TT
|
||||
></A
|
||||
> parameter. Any bits
|
||||
that were changed that correspond to bits set to '1' in this parameter
|
||||
are forced to be set.</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Essentially, bits set in the <TT
|
||||
CLASS="PARAMETER"
|
||||
><I
|
||||
>force security mode
|
||||
</I
|
||||
></TT
|
||||
> parameter may be treated as a set of bits that, when
|
||||
modifying security on a file, the user has always set to be 'on'.</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>If not set explicitly this parameter is set to the same value
|
||||
as the <A
|
||||
HREF="smb.conf.5.html#FORCECREATEMODE"
|
||||
TARGET="_top"
|
||||
><TT
|
||||
CLASS="PARAMETER"
|
||||
><I
|
||||
>force
|
||||
create mode</I
|
||||
></TT
|
||||
></A
|
||||
> parameter to provide compatibility
|
||||
with Samba 2.0.4 where the permission change facility was introduced.
|
||||
To allow a user to modify all the user/group/world permissions on a file
|
||||
with no restrictions set this parameter to 000.</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>The <TT
|
||||
CLASS="PARAMETER"
|
||||
><I
|
||||
>security mask</I
|
||||
></TT
|
||||
> and <TT
|
||||
CLASS="PARAMETER"
|
||||
><I
|
||||
>force
|
||||
security mode</I
|
||||
></TT
|
||||
> parameters are applied to the change
|
||||
request in that order.</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>For a directory Samba will perform the same operations as
|
||||
described above for a file except using the parameter <TT
|
||||
CLASS="PARAMETER"
|
||||
><I
|
||||
> directory security mask</I
|
||||
></TT
|
||||
> instead of <TT
|
||||
CLASS="PARAMETER"
|
||||
><I
|
||||
>security
|
||||
mask</I
|
||||
></TT
|
||||
>, and <TT
|
||||
CLASS="PARAMETER"
|
||||
><I
|
||||
>force directory security mode
|
||||
</I
|
||||
></TT
|
||||
> parameter instead of <TT
|
||||
CLASS="PARAMETER"
|
||||
><I
|
||||
>force security mode
|
||||
</I
|
||||
></TT
|
||||
>.</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>The <TT
|
||||
CLASS="PARAMETER"
|
||||
><I
|
||||
>directory security mask</I
|
||||
></TT
|
||||
> parameter
|
||||
by default is set to the same value as the <TT
|
||||
CLASS="PARAMETER"
|
||||
><I
|
||||
>directory mask
|
||||
</I
|
||||
></TT
|
||||
> parameter and the <TT
|
||||
CLASS="PARAMETER"
|
||||
><I
|
||||
>force directory security
|
||||
mode</I
|
||||
></TT
|
||||
> parameter by default is set to the same value as
|
||||
the <TT
|
||||
CLASS="PARAMETER"
|
||||
><I
|
||||
>force directory mode</I
|
||||
></TT
|
||||
> parameter to provide
|
||||
compatibility with Samba 2.0.4 where the permission change facility
|
||||
was introduced.</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>In this way Samba enforces the permission restrictions that
|
||||
an administrator can set on a Samba share, whilst still allowing users
|
||||
to modify the permission bits within that restriction.</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>If you want to set up a share that allows users full control
|
||||
in modifying the permission bits on their files and directories and
|
||||
doesn't force any particular bits to be set 'on', then set the following
|
||||
parameters in the <A
|
||||
HREF="smb.conf.5.html"
|
||||
TARGET="_top"
|
||||
><TT
|
||||
CLASS="FILENAME"
|
||||
>smb.conf(5)
|
||||
</TT
|
||||
></A
|
||||
> file in that share specific section :</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
><TT
|
||||
CLASS="PARAMETER"
|
||||
><I
|
||||
>security mask = 0777</I
|
||||
></TT
|
||||
></P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
><TT
|
||||
CLASS="PARAMETER"
|
||||
><I
|
||||
>force security mode = 0</I
|
||||
></TT
|
||||
></P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
><TT
|
||||
CLASS="PARAMETER"
|
||||
><I
|
||||
>directory security mask = 0777</I
|
||||
></TT
|
||||
></P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
><TT
|
||||
CLASS="PARAMETER"
|
||||
><I
|
||||
>force directory security mode = 0</I
|
||||
></TT
|
||||
></P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>As described, in Samba 2.0.4 the parameters :</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
><TT
|
||||
CLASS="PARAMETER"
|
||||
><I
|
||||
>create mask</I
|
||||
></TT
|
||||
></P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
><TT
|
||||
CLASS="PARAMETER"
|
||||
><I
|
||||
>force create mode</I
|
||||
></TT
|
||||
></P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
><TT
|
||||
CLASS="PARAMETER"
|
||||
><I
|
||||
>directory mask</I
|
||||
></TT
|
||||
></P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
><TT
|
||||
CLASS="PARAMETER"
|
||||
><I
|
||||
>force directory mode</I
|
||||
></TT
|
||||
></P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>were used instead of the parameters discussed here.</P
|
||||
></DIV
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><HR><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN165"
|
||||
>Interaction with the standard Samba file attribute
|
||||
mapping</A
|
||||
></H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Samba maps some of the DOS attribute bits (such as "read
|
||||
only") into the UNIX permissions of a file. This means there can
|
||||
be a conflict between the permission bits set via the security
|
||||
dialog and the permission bits set by the file attribute mapping.
|
||||
</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>One way this can show up is if a file has no UNIX read access
|
||||
for the owner it will show up as "read only" in the standard
|
||||
file attributes tabbed dialog. Unfortunately this dialog is
|
||||
the same one that contains the security info in another tab.</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>What this can mean is that if the owner changes the permissions
|
||||
to allow themselves read access using the security dialog, clicks
|
||||
<B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>"OK"</B
|
||||
> to get back to the standard attributes tab
|
||||
dialog, and then clicks <B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>"OK"</B
|
||||
> on that dialog, then
|
||||
NT will set the file permissions back to read-only (as that is what
|
||||
the attributes still say in the dialog). This means that after setting
|
||||
permissions and clicking <B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>"OK"</B
|
||||
> to get back to the
|
||||
attributes dialog you should always hit <B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>"Cancel"</B
|
||||
>
|
||||
rather than <B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>"OK"</B
|
||||
> to ensure that your changes
|
||||
are not overridden.</P
|
||||
></DIV
|
||||
></DIV
|
||||
></BODY
|
||||
></HTML
|
||||
>
|
File diff suppressed because it is too large
Load Diff
File diff suppressed because it is too large
Load Diff
File diff suppressed because it is too large
Load Diff
File diff suppressed because it is too large
Load Diff
@ -9,12 +9,15 @@ CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.77"><LINK
|
||||
REL="HOME"
|
||||
TITLE="SAMBA Project Documentation"
|
||||
HREF="samba-howto-collection.html"><LINK
|
||||
REL="UP"
|
||||
TITLE="General installation"
|
||||
HREF="introduction.html"><LINK
|
||||
REL="PREVIOUS"
|
||||
TITLE="Improved browsing in samba"
|
||||
HREF="improved-browsing.html"><LINK
|
||||
TITLE="Oplocks"
|
||||
HREF="oplocks.html"><LINK
|
||||
REL="NEXT"
|
||||
TITLE="Samba performance issues"
|
||||
HREF="speed.html"></HEAD
|
||||
TITLE="LanMan and NT Password Encryption in Samba"
|
||||
HREF="pwencrypt.html"></HEAD
|
||||
><BODY
|
||||
CLASS="CHAPTER"
|
||||
BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF"
|
||||
@ -42,7 +45,7 @@ WIDTH="10%"
|
||||
ALIGN="left"
|
||||
VALIGN="bottom"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
HREF="improved-browsing.html"
|
||||
HREF="oplocks.html"
|
||||
ACCESSKEY="P"
|
||||
>Prev</A
|
||||
></TD
|
||||
@ -56,7 +59,7 @@ WIDTH="10%"
|
||||
ALIGN="right"
|
||||
VALIGN="bottom"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
HREF="speed.html"
|
||||
HREF="pwencrypt.html"
|
||||
ACCESSKEY="N"
|
||||
>Next</A
|
||||
></TD
|
||||
@ -71,7 +74,7 @@ CLASS="CHAPTER"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="BROWSING-QUICK"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>Chapter 16. Quick Cross Subnet Browsing / Cross Workgroup Browsing guide</H1
|
||||
>Chapter 4. Quick Cross Subnet Browsing / Cross Workgroup Browsing guide</H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>This document should be read in conjunction with Browsing and may
|
||||
be taken as the fast track guide to implementing browsing across subnets
|
||||
@ -83,9 +86,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN2665"
|
||||
NAME="AEN393"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>16.1. Discussion</H1
|
||||
>4.1. Discussion</H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Firstly, all MS Windows networking is based on SMB (Server Message
|
||||
Block) based messaging. SMB messaging is implemented using NetBIOS. Samba
|
||||
@ -129,9 +132,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN2673"
|
||||
NAME="AEN401"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>16.2. Use of the "Remote Announce" parameter</H1
|
||||
>4.2. Use of the "Remote Announce" parameter</H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>The "remote announce" parameter of smb.conf can be used to forcibly ensure
|
||||
that all the NetBIOS names on a network get announced to a remote network.
|
||||
@ -187,9 +190,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN2687"
|
||||
NAME="AEN415"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>16.3. Use of the "Remote Browse Sync" parameter</H1
|
||||
>4.3. Use of the "Remote Browse Sync" parameter</H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>The "remote browse sync" parameter of smb.conf is used to announce to
|
||||
another LMB that it must synchronise it's NetBIOS name list with our
|
||||
@ -209,9 +212,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN2692"
|
||||
NAME="AEN420"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>16.4. Use of WINS</H1
|
||||
>4.4. Use of WINS</H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Use of WINS (either Samba WINS _or_ MS Windows NT Server WINS) is highly
|
||||
recommended. Every NetBIOS machine registers it's name together with a
|
||||
@ -271,9 +274,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN2703"
|
||||
NAME="AEN431"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>16.5. Do NOT use more than one (1) protocol on MS Windows machines</H1
|
||||
>4.5. Do NOT use more than one (1) protocol on MS Windows machines</H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>A very common cause of browsing problems results from installing more than
|
||||
one protocol on an MS Windows machine.</P
|
||||
@ -301,9 +304,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN2709"
|
||||
NAME="AEN437"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>16.6. Name Resolution Order</H1
|
||||
>4.6. Name Resolution Order</H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Resolution of NetBIOS names to IP addresses can take place using a number
|
||||
of methods. The only ones that can provide NetBIOS name_type information
|
||||
@ -398,7 +401,7 @@ WIDTH="33%"
|
||||
ALIGN="left"
|
||||
VALIGN="top"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
HREF="improved-browsing.html"
|
||||
HREF="oplocks.html"
|
||||
ACCESSKEY="P"
|
||||
>Prev</A
|
||||
></TD
|
||||
@ -416,7 +419,7 @@ WIDTH="33%"
|
||||
ALIGN="right"
|
||||
VALIGN="top"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
HREF="speed.html"
|
||||
HREF="pwencrypt.html"
|
||||
ACCESSKEY="N"
|
||||
>Next</A
|
||||
></TD
|
||||
@ -426,17 +429,21 @@ ACCESSKEY="N"
|
||||
WIDTH="33%"
|
||||
ALIGN="left"
|
||||
VALIGN="top"
|
||||
>Improved browsing in samba</TD
|
||||
>Oplocks</TD
|
||||
><TD
|
||||
WIDTH="34%"
|
||||
ALIGN="center"
|
||||
VALIGN="top"
|
||||
> </TD
|
||||
><A
|
||||
HREF="introduction.html"
|
||||
ACCESSKEY="U"
|
||||
>Up</A
|
||||
></TD
|
||||
><TD
|
||||
WIDTH="33%"
|
||||
ALIGN="right"
|
||||
VALIGN="top"
|
||||
>Samba performance issues</TD
|
||||
>LanMan and NT Password Encryption in Samba</TD
|
||||
></TR
|
||||
></TABLE
|
||||
></DIV
|
||||
|
@ -9,12 +9,15 @@ CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.77"><LINK
|
||||
REL="HOME"
|
||||
TITLE="SAMBA Project Documentation"
|
||||
HREF="samba-howto-collection.html"><LINK
|
||||
REL="UP"
|
||||
TITLE="Appendixes"
|
||||
HREF="appendixes.html"><LINK
|
||||
REL="PREVIOUS"
|
||||
TITLE="HOWTO Access Samba source code via CVS"
|
||||
HREF="cvs-access.html"><LINK
|
||||
TITLE="Samba and other CIFS clients"
|
||||
HREF="other-clients.html"><LINK
|
||||
REL="NEXT"
|
||||
TITLE="Group mapping HOWTO"
|
||||
HREF="groupmapping.html"></HEAD
|
||||
TITLE="Diagnosing your samba server"
|
||||
HREF="diagnosis.html"></HEAD
|
||||
><BODY
|
||||
CLASS="CHAPTER"
|
||||
BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF"
|
||||
@ -42,7 +45,7 @@ WIDTH="10%"
|
||||
ALIGN="left"
|
||||
VALIGN="bottom"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
HREF="cvs-access.html"
|
||||
HREF="other-clients.html"
|
||||
ACCESSKEY="P"
|
||||
>Prev</A
|
||||
></TD
|
||||
@ -56,7 +59,7 @@ WIDTH="10%"
|
||||
ALIGN="right"
|
||||
VALIGN="bottom"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
HREF="groupmapping.html"
|
||||
HREF="diagnosis.html"
|
||||
ACCESSKEY="N"
|
||||
>Next</A
|
||||
></TD
|
||||
@ -71,17 +74,26 @@ CLASS="CHAPTER"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="BUGREPORT"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>Chapter 19. Reporting Bugs</H1
|
||||
>Chapter 26. Reporting Bugs</H1
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN2921"
|
||||
NAME="AEN3368"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>19.1. Introduction</H1
|
||||
>26.1. Introduction</H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>The email address for bug reports is samba@samba.org</P
|
||||
>The email address for bug reports for stable releases is <A
|
||||
HREF="samba@samba.org"
|
||||
TARGET="_top"
|
||||
>samba@samba.org</A
|
||||
>.
|
||||
Bug reports for alpha releases should go to <A
|
||||
HREF="mailto:samba-technical@samba.org"
|
||||
TARGET="_top"
|
||||
>samba-technical@samba.org</A
|
||||
>.</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Please take the time to read this file before you submit a bug
|
||||
report. Also, please see if it has changed between releases, as we
|
||||
@ -102,16 +114,20 @@ that list that may be able to help you.</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>You may also like to look though the recent mailing list archives,
|
||||
which are conveniently accessible on the Samba web pages
|
||||
at http://samba.org/samba/ </P
|
||||
at <A
|
||||
HREF="http://samba.org/samba/"
|
||||
TARGET="_top"
|
||||
>http://samba.org/samba/</A
|
||||
>.</P
|
||||
></DIV
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN2928"
|
||||
NAME="AEN3378"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>19.2. General info</H1
|
||||
>26.2. General info</H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Before submitting a bug report check your config for silly
|
||||
errors. Look in your log files for obvious messages that tell you that
|
||||
@ -134,9 +150,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN2934"
|
||||
NAME="AEN3384"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>19.3. Debug levels</H1
|
||||
>26.3. Debug levels</H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>If the bug has anything to do with Samba behaving incorrectly as a
|
||||
server (like refusing to open a file) then the log files will probably
|
||||
@ -204,9 +220,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN2951"
|
||||
NAME="AEN3401"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>19.4. Internal errors</H1
|
||||
>26.4. Internal errors</H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>If you get a "INTERNAL ERROR" message in your log files it means that
|
||||
Samba got an unexpected signal while running. It is probably a
|
||||
@ -248,9 +264,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN2961"
|
||||
NAME="AEN3411"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>19.5. Attaching to a running process</H1
|
||||
>26.5. Attaching to a running process</H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Unfortunately some unixes (in particular some recent linux kernels)
|
||||
refuse to dump a core file if the task has changed uid (which smbd
|
||||
@ -265,9 +281,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN2964"
|
||||
NAME="AEN3414"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>19.6. Patches</H1
|
||||
>26.6. Patches</H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>The best sort of bug report is one that includes a fix! If you send us
|
||||
patches please use <B
|
||||
@ -298,7 +314,7 @@ WIDTH="33%"
|
||||
ALIGN="left"
|
||||
VALIGN="top"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
HREF="cvs-access.html"
|
||||
HREF="other-clients.html"
|
||||
ACCESSKEY="P"
|
||||
>Prev</A
|
||||
></TD
|
||||
@ -316,7 +332,7 @@ WIDTH="33%"
|
||||
ALIGN="right"
|
||||
VALIGN="top"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
HREF="groupmapping.html"
|
||||
HREF="diagnosis.html"
|
||||
ACCESSKEY="N"
|
||||
>Next</A
|
||||
></TD
|
||||
@ -326,17 +342,21 @@ ACCESSKEY="N"
|
||||
WIDTH="33%"
|
||||
ALIGN="left"
|
||||
VALIGN="top"
|
||||
>HOWTO Access Samba source code via CVS</TD
|
||||
>Samba and other CIFS clients</TD
|
||||
><TD
|
||||
WIDTH="34%"
|
||||
ALIGN="center"
|
||||
VALIGN="top"
|
||||
> </TD
|
||||
><A
|
||||
HREF="appendixes.html"
|
||||
ACCESSKEY="U"
|
||||
>Up</A
|
||||
></TD
|
||||
><TD
|
||||
WIDTH="33%"
|
||||
ALIGN="right"
|
||||
VALIGN="top"
|
||||
>Group mapping HOWTO</TD
|
||||
>Diagnosing your samba server</TD
|
||||
></TR
|
||||
></TABLE
|
||||
></DIV
|
||||
|
@ -9,12 +9,15 @@ CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.77"><LINK
|
||||
REL="HOME"
|
||||
TITLE="SAMBA Project Documentation"
|
||||
HREF="samba-howto-collection.html"><LINK
|
||||
REL="UP"
|
||||
TITLE="Optional configuration"
|
||||
HREF="optional.html"><LINK
|
||||
REL="PREVIOUS"
|
||||
TITLE="Samba performance issues"
|
||||
HREF="speed.html"><LINK
|
||||
TITLE="Storing Samba's User/Machine Account information in an LDAP Directory"
|
||||
HREF="samba-ldap-howto.html"><LINK
|
||||
REL="NEXT"
|
||||
TITLE="Reporting Bugs"
|
||||
HREF="bugreport.html"></HEAD
|
||||
TITLE="Group mapping HOWTO"
|
||||
HREF="groupmapping.html"></HEAD
|
||||
><BODY
|
||||
CLASS="CHAPTER"
|
||||
BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF"
|
||||
@ -42,7 +45,7 @@ WIDTH="10%"
|
||||
ALIGN="left"
|
||||
VALIGN="bottom"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
HREF="speed.html"
|
||||
HREF="samba-ldap-howto.html"
|
||||
ACCESSKEY="P"
|
||||
>Prev</A
|
||||
></TD
|
||||
@ -56,7 +59,7 @@ WIDTH="10%"
|
||||
ALIGN="right"
|
||||
VALIGN="bottom"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
HREF="bugreport.html"
|
||||
HREF="groupmapping.html"
|
||||
ACCESSKEY="N"
|
||||
>Next</A
|
||||
></TD
|
||||
@ -71,15 +74,15 @@ CLASS="CHAPTER"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="CVS-ACCESS"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>Chapter 18. HOWTO Access Samba source code via CVS</H1
|
||||
>Chapter 21. HOWTO Access Samba source code via CVS</H1
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN2873"
|
||||
NAME="AEN2974"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>18.1. Introduction</H1
|
||||
>21.1. Introduction</H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Samba is developed in an open environment. Developers use CVS
|
||||
(Concurrent Versioning System) to "checkin" (also known as
|
||||
@ -99,9 +102,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN2878"
|
||||
NAME="AEN2979"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>18.2. CVS Access to samba.org</H1
|
||||
>21.2. CVS Access to samba.org</H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>The machine samba.org runs a publicly accessible CVS
|
||||
repository for access to the source code of several packages,
|
||||
@ -112,9 +115,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN2881"
|
||||
NAME="AEN2982"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>18.2.1. Access via CVSweb</H2
|
||||
>21.2.1. Access via CVSweb</H2
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>You can access the source code via your
|
||||
favourite WWW browser. This allows you to access the contents of
|
||||
@ -133,9 +136,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN2886"
|
||||
NAME="AEN2987"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>18.2.2. Access via cvs</H2
|
||||
>21.2.2. Access via cvs</H2
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>You can also access the source code via a
|
||||
normal cvs client. This gives you much more control over you can
|
||||
@ -253,7 +256,7 @@ WIDTH="33%"
|
||||
ALIGN="left"
|
||||
VALIGN="top"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
HREF="speed.html"
|
||||
HREF="samba-ldap-howto.html"
|
||||
ACCESSKEY="P"
|
||||
>Prev</A
|
||||
></TD
|
||||
@ -271,7 +274,7 @@ WIDTH="33%"
|
||||
ALIGN="right"
|
||||
VALIGN="top"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
HREF="bugreport.html"
|
||||
HREF="groupmapping.html"
|
||||
ACCESSKEY="N"
|
||||
>Next</A
|
||||
></TD
|
||||
@ -281,17 +284,21 @@ ACCESSKEY="N"
|
||||
WIDTH="33%"
|
||||
ALIGN="left"
|
||||
VALIGN="top"
|
||||
>Samba performance issues</TD
|
||||
>Storing Samba's User/Machine Account information in an LDAP Directory</TD
|
||||
><TD
|
||||
WIDTH="34%"
|
||||
ALIGN="center"
|
||||
VALIGN="top"
|
||||
> </TD
|
||||
><A
|
||||
HREF="optional.html"
|
||||
ACCESSKEY="U"
|
||||
>Up</A
|
||||
></TD
|
||||
><TD
|
||||
WIDTH="33%"
|
||||
ALIGN="right"
|
||||
VALIGN="top"
|
||||
>Reporting Bugs</TD
|
||||
>Group mapping HOWTO</TD
|
||||
></TR
|
||||
></TABLE
|
||||
></DIV
|
||||
|
@ -9,9 +9,12 @@ CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.77"><LINK
|
||||
REL="HOME"
|
||||
TITLE="SAMBA Project Documentation"
|
||||
HREF="samba-howto-collection.html"><LINK
|
||||
REL="UP"
|
||||
TITLE="Appendixes"
|
||||
HREF="appendixes.html"><LINK
|
||||
REL="PREVIOUS"
|
||||
TITLE="Samba and other CIFS clients"
|
||||
HREF="other-clients.html"></HEAD
|
||||
TITLE="Reporting Bugs"
|
||||
HREF="bugreport.html"></HEAD
|
||||
><BODY
|
||||
CLASS="CHAPTER"
|
||||
BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF"
|
||||
@ -39,7 +42,7 @@ WIDTH="10%"
|
||||
ALIGN="left"
|
||||
VALIGN="bottom"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
HREF="other-clients.html"
|
||||
HREF="bugreport.html"
|
||||
ACCESSKEY="P"
|
||||
>Prev</A
|
||||
></TD
|
||||
@ -64,47 +67,44 @@ CLASS="CHAPTER"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="DIAGNOSIS"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>Chapter 23. Diagnosing your samba server</H1
|
||||
>Chapter 27. Diagnosing your samba server</H1
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN3184"
|
||||
NAME="AEN3437"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>23.1. Introduction</H1
|
||||
>27.1. Introduction</H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>This file contains a list of tests you can perform to validate your
|
||||
Samba server. It also tells you what the likely cause of the problem
|
||||
is if it fails any one of these steps. If it passes all these tests
|
||||
then it is probably working fine.</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>You should do ALL the tests, in the order shown. I have tried to
|
||||
>You should do ALL the tests, in the order shown. We have tried to
|
||||
carefully choose them so later tests only use capabilities verified in
|
||||
the earlier tests.</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>If you send me an email saying "it doesn't work" and you have not
|
||||
followed this test procedure then you should not be surprised if I
|
||||
ignore your email.</P
|
||||
>If you send one of the samba mailing lists an email saying "it doesn't work"
|
||||
and you have not followed this test procedure then you should not be surprised
|
||||
your email is ignored.</P
|
||||
></DIV
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN3189"
|
||||
NAME="AEN3442"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>23.2. Assumptions</H1
|
||||
>27.2. Assumptions</H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>In all of the tests I assume you have a Samba server called BIGSERVER
|
||||
and a PC called ACLIENT both in workgroup TESTGROUP. I also assume the
|
||||
PC is running windows for workgroups with a recent copy of the
|
||||
microsoft tcp/ip stack. Alternatively, your PC may be running Windows
|
||||
95 or Windows NT (Workstation or Server).</P
|
||||
>In all of the tests it is assumed you have a Samba server called
|
||||
BIGSERVER and a PC called ACLIENT both in workgroup TESTGROUP.</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>The procedure is similar for other types of clients.</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>I also assume you know the name of an available share in your
|
||||
>It is also assumed you know the name of an available share in your
|
||||
smb.conf. I will assume this share is called "tmp". You can add a
|
||||
"tmp" share like by adding the following to smb.conf:</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
@ -116,7 +116,7 @@ CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING"
|
||||
read only = yes </PRE
|
||||
></P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>THESE TESTS ASSUME VERSION 2.0.6 OR LATER OF THE SAMBA SUITE. SOME
|
||||
>THESE TESTS ASSUME VERSION 3.0.0 OR LATER OF THE SAMBA SUITE. SOME
|
||||
COMMANDS SHOWN DID NOT EXIST IN EARLIER VERSIONS</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Please pay attention to the error messages you receive. If any error message
|
||||
@ -133,17 +133,17 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN3199"
|
||||
NAME="AEN3452"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>23.3. Tests</H1
|
||||
>27.3. Tests</H1
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN3201"
|
||||
NAME="AEN3454"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>23.3.1. Test 1</H2
|
||||
>27.3.1. Test 1</H2
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>In the directory in which you store your smb.conf file, run the command
|
||||
"testparm smb.conf". If it reports any errors then your smb.conf
|
||||
@ -151,7 +151,7 @@ configuration file is faulty.</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Note: Your smb.conf file may be located in: <TT
|
||||
CLASS="FILENAME"
|
||||
>/etc</TT
|
||||
>/etc/samba</TT
|
||||
>
|
||||
Or in: <TT
|
||||
CLASS="FILENAME"
|
||||
@ -163,9 +163,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN3207"
|
||||
NAME="AEN3460"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>23.3.2. Test 2</H2
|
||||
>27.3.2. Test 2</H2
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Run the command "ping BIGSERVER" from the PC and "ping ACLIENT" from
|
||||
the unix box. If you don't get a valid response then your TCP/IP
|
||||
@ -189,9 +189,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN3213"
|
||||
NAME="AEN3466"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>23.3.3. Test 3</H2
|
||||
>27.3.3. Test 3</H2
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Run the command "smbclient -L BIGSERVER" on the unix box. You
|
||||
should get a list of available shares back. </P
|
||||
@ -260,9 +260,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN3228"
|
||||
NAME="AEN3481"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>23.3.4. Test 4</H2
|
||||
>27.3.4. Test 4</H2
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Run the command "nmblookup -B BIGSERVER __SAMBA__". You should get the
|
||||
IP address of your Samba server back.</P
|
||||
@ -281,9 +281,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN3233"
|
||||
NAME="AEN3486"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>23.3.5. Test 5</H2
|
||||
>27.3.5. Test 5</H2
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>run the command <B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
@ -302,9 +302,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN3239"
|
||||
NAME="AEN3492"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>23.3.6. Test 6</H2
|
||||
>27.3.6. Test 6</H2
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Run the command <B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
@ -336,9 +336,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN3247"
|
||||
NAME="AEN3500"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>23.3.7. Test 7</H2
|
||||
>27.3.7. Test 7</H2
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Run the command <B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
@ -425,9 +425,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN3273"
|
||||
NAME="AEN3526"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>23.3.8. Test 8</H2
|
||||
>27.3.8. Test 8</H2
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>On the PC type the command <B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
@ -485,9 +485,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN3290"
|
||||
NAME="AEN3543"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>23.3.9. Test 9</H2
|
||||
>27.3.9. Test 9</H2
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Run the command <B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
@ -519,9 +519,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN3298"
|
||||
NAME="AEN3551"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>23.3.10. Test 10</H2
|
||||
>27.3.10. Test 10</H2
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Run the command <B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
@ -545,9 +545,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN3304"
|
||||
NAME="AEN3557"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>23.3.11. Test 11</H2
|
||||
>27.3.11. Test 11</H2
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>From file manager try to browse the server. Your samba server should
|
||||
appear in the browse list of your local workgroup (or the one you
|
||||
@ -573,9 +573,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN3309"
|
||||
NAME="AEN3562"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>23.4. Still having troubles?</H1
|
||||
>27.4. Still having troubles?</H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Try the mailing list or newsgroup, or use the ethereal utility to
|
||||
sniff the problem. The official samba mailing list can be reached at
|
||||
@ -611,7 +611,7 @@ WIDTH="33%"
|
||||
ALIGN="left"
|
||||
VALIGN="top"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
HREF="other-clients.html"
|
||||
HREF="bugreport.html"
|
||||
ACCESSKEY="P"
|
||||
>Prev</A
|
||||
></TD
|
||||
@ -635,12 +635,16 @@ VALIGN="top"
|
||||
WIDTH="33%"
|
||||
ALIGN="left"
|
||||
VALIGN="top"
|
||||
>Samba and other CIFS clients</TD
|
||||
>Reporting Bugs</TD
|
||||
><TD
|
||||
WIDTH="34%"
|
||||
ALIGN="center"
|
||||
VALIGN="top"
|
||||
> </TD
|
||||
><A
|
||||
HREF="appendixes.html"
|
||||
ACCESSKEY="U"
|
||||
>Up</A
|
||||
></TD
|
||||
><TD
|
||||
WIDTH="33%"
|
||||
ALIGN="right"
|
||||
|
@ -2,19 +2,22 @@
|
||||
<HTML
|
||||
><HEAD
|
||||
><TITLE
|
||||
>security = domain in Samba 2.x</TITLE
|
||||
>Samba as a NT4 domain member</TITLE
|
||||
><META
|
||||
NAME="GENERATOR"
|
||||
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.77"><LINK
|
||||
REL="HOME"
|
||||
TITLE="SAMBA Project Documentation"
|
||||
HREF="samba-howto-collection.html"><LINK
|
||||
REL="UP"
|
||||
TITLE="Type of installation"
|
||||
HREF="type.html"><LINK
|
||||
REL="PREVIOUS"
|
||||
TITLE="Security levels"
|
||||
HREF="securitylevels.html"><LINK
|
||||
TITLE="Samba as a ADS domain member"
|
||||
HREF="ads.html"><LINK
|
||||
REL="NEXT"
|
||||
TITLE="Unified Logons between Windows NT and UNIX using Winbind"
|
||||
HREF="winbind.html"></HEAD
|
||||
TITLE="Optional configuration"
|
||||
HREF="optional.html"></HEAD
|
||||
><BODY
|
||||
CLASS="CHAPTER"
|
||||
BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF"
|
||||
@ -42,7 +45,7 @@ WIDTH="10%"
|
||||
ALIGN="left"
|
||||
VALIGN="bottom"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
HREF="securitylevels.html"
|
||||
HREF="ads.html"
|
||||
ACCESSKEY="P"
|
||||
>Prev</A
|
||||
></TD
|
||||
@ -56,7 +59,7 @@ WIDTH="10%"
|
||||
ALIGN="right"
|
||||
VALIGN="bottom"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
HREF="winbind.html"
|
||||
HREF="optional.html"
|
||||
ACCESSKEY="N"
|
||||
>Next</A
|
||||
></TD
|
||||
@ -71,15 +74,15 @@ CLASS="CHAPTER"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="DOMAIN-SECURITY"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>Chapter 9. security = domain in Samba 2.x</H1
|
||||
>Chapter 10. Samba as a NT4 domain member</H1
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN1133"
|
||||
NAME="AEN1286"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>9.1. Joining an NT Domain with Samba 2.2</H1
|
||||
>10.1. Joining an NT Domain with Samba 2.2</H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Assume you have a Samba 2.x server with a NetBIOS name of
|
||||
<TT
|
||||
@ -308,12 +311,12 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN1197"
|
||||
NAME="AEN1350"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>9.2. Samba and Windows 2000 Domains</H1
|
||||
>10.2. Samba and Windows 2000 Domains</H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Many people have asked regarding the state of Samba's ability to participate in
|
||||
a Windows 2000 Domain. Samba 2.2 is able to act as a member server of a Windows
|
||||
a Windows 2000 Domain. Samba 3.0 is able to act as a member server of a Windows
|
||||
2000 domain operating in mixed or native mode.</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>There is much confusion between the circumstances that require a "mixed" mode
|
||||
@ -333,9 +336,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN1202"
|
||||
NAME="AEN1355"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>9.3. Why is this better than security = server?</H1
|
||||
>10.3. Why is this better than security = server?</H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Currently, domain security in Samba doesn't free you from
|
||||
having to create local Unix users to represent the users attaching
|
||||
@ -435,7 +438,7 @@ WIDTH="33%"
|
||||
ALIGN="left"
|
||||
VALIGN="top"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
HREF="securitylevels.html"
|
||||
HREF="ads.html"
|
||||
ACCESSKEY="P"
|
||||
>Prev</A
|
||||
></TD
|
||||
@ -453,7 +456,7 @@ WIDTH="33%"
|
||||
ALIGN="right"
|
||||
VALIGN="top"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
HREF="winbind.html"
|
||||
HREF="optional.html"
|
||||
ACCESSKEY="N"
|
||||
>Next</A
|
||||
></TD
|
||||
@ -463,17 +466,21 @@ ACCESSKEY="N"
|
||||
WIDTH="33%"
|
||||
ALIGN="left"
|
||||
VALIGN="top"
|
||||
>Security levels</TD
|
||||
>Samba as a ADS domain member</TD
|
||||
><TD
|
||||
WIDTH="34%"
|
||||
ALIGN="center"
|
||||
VALIGN="top"
|
||||
> </TD
|
||||
><A
|
||||
HREF="type.html"
|
||||
ACCESSKEY="U"
|
||||
>Up</A
|
||||
></TD
|
||||
><TD
|
||||
WIDTH="33%"
|
||||
ALIGN="right"
|
||||
VALIGN="top"
|
||||
>Unified Logons between Windows NT and UNIX using Winbind</TD
|
||||
>Optional configuration</TD
|
||||
></TR
|
||||
></TABLE
|
||||
></DIV
|
||||
|
@ -193,7 +193,7 @@ NAME="AEN48"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
>VERSION</H2
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>This man page is correct for version 2.2 of
|
||||
>This man page is correct for version 3.0 of
|
||||
the Samba suite.</P
|
||||
></DIV
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
|
@ -9,12 +9,15 @@ CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.77"><LINK
|
||||
REL="HOME"
|
||||
TITLE="SAMBA Project Documentation"
|
||||
HREF="samba-howto-collection.html"><LINK
|
||||
REL="UP"
|
||||
TITLE="Optional configuration"
|
||||
HREF="optional.html"><LINK
|
||||
REL="PREVIOUS"
|
||||
TITLE="Reporting Bugs"
|
||||
HREF="bugreport.html"><LINK
|
||||
TITLE="HOWTO Access Samba source code via CVS"
|
||||
HREF="cvs-access.html"><LINK
|
||||
REL="NEXT"
|
||||
TITLE="Portability"
|
||||
HREF="portability.html"></HEAD
|
||||
TITLE="Samba performance issues"
|
||||
HREF="speed.html"></HEAD
|
||||
><BODY
|
||||
CLASS="CHAPTER"
|
||||
BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF"
|
||||
@ -42,7 +45,7 @@ WIDTH="10%"
|
||||
ALIGN="left"
|
||||
VALIGN="bottom"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
HREF="bugreport.html"
|
||||
HREF="cvs-access.html"
|
||||
ACCESSKEY="P"
|
||||
>Prev</A
|
||||
></TD
|
||||
@ -56,7 +59,7 @@ WIDTH="10%"
|
||||
ALIGN="right"
|
||||
VALIGN="bottom"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
HREF="portability.html"
|
||||
HREF="speed.html"
|
||||
ACCESSKEY="N"
|
||||
>Next</A
|
||||
></TD
|
||||
@ -71,7 +74,7 @@ CLASS="CHAPTER"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="GROUPMAPPING"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>Chapter 20. Group mapping HOWTO</H1
|
||||
>Chapter 22. Group mapping HOWTO</H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>
|
||||
Starting with Samba 3.0 alpha 2, a new group mapping function is available. The
|
||||
@ -182,7 +185,7 @@ WIDTH="33%"
|
||||
ALIGN="left"
|
||||
VALIGN="top"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
HREF="bugreport.html"
|
||||
HREF="cvs-access.html"
|
||||
ACCESSKEY="P"
|
||||
>Prev</A
|
||||
></TD
|
||||
@ -200,7 +203,7 @@ WIDTH="33%"
|
||||
ALIGN="right"
|
||||
VALIGN="top"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
HREF="portability.html"
|
||||
HREF="speed.html"
|
||||
ACCESSKEY="N"
|
||||
>Next</A
|
||||
></TD
|
||||
@ -210,17 +213,21 @@ ACCESSKEY="N"
|
||||
WIDTH="33%"
|
||||
ALIGN="left"
|
||||
VALIGN="top"
|
||||
>Reporting Bugs</TD
|
||||
>HOWTO Access Samba source code via CVS</TD
|
||||
><TD
|
||||
WIDTH="34%"
|
||||
ALIGN="center"
|
||||
VALIGN="top"
|
||||
> </TD
|
||||
><A
|
||||
HREF="optional.html"
|
||||
ACCESSKEY="U"
|
||||
>Up</A
|
||||
></TD
|
||||
><TD
|
||||
WIDTH="33%"
|
||||
ALIGN="right"
|
||||
VALIGN="top"
|
||||
>Portability</TD
|
||||
>Samba performance issues</TD
|
||||
></TR
|
||||
></TABLE
|
||||
></DIV
|
||||
|
@ -9,12 +9,15 @@ CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.77"><LINK
|
||||
REL="HOME"
|
||||
TITLE="SAMBA Project Documentation"
|
||||
HREF="samba-howto-collection.html"><LINK
|
||||
REL="UP"
|
||||
TITLE="General installation"
|
||||
HREF="introduction.html"><LINK
|
||||
REL="PREVIOUS"
|
||||
TITLE="Using samba 3.0 with ActiveDirectory support"
|
||||
HREF="ads.html"><LINK
|
||||
TITLE="How to Install and Test SAMBA"
|
||||
HREF="install.html"><LINK
|
||||
REL="NEXT"
|
||||
TITLE="Quick Cross Subnet Browsing / Cross Workgroup Browsing guide"
|
||||
HREF="browsing-quick.html"></HEAD
|
||||
TITLE="Oplocks"
|
||||
HREF="oplocks.html"></HEAD
|
||||
><BODY
|
||||
CLASS="CHAPTER"
|
||||
BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF"
|
||||
@ -42,7 +45,7 @@ WIDTH="10%"
|
||||
ALIGN="left"
|
||||
VALIGN="bottom"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
HREF="ads.html"
|
||||
HREF="install.html"
|
||||
ACCESSKEY="P"
|
||||
>Prev</A
|
||||
></TD
|
||||
@ -56,7 +59,7 @@ WIDTH="10%"
|
||||
ALIGN="right"
|
||||
VALIGN="bottom"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
HREF="browsing-quick.html"
|
||||
HREF="oplocks.html"
|
||||
ACCESSKEY="N"
|
||||
>Next</A
|
||||
></TD
|
||||
@ -71,15 +74,15 @@ CLASS="CHAPTER"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="IMPROVED-BROWSING"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>Chapter 15. Improved browsing in samba</H1
|
||||
>Chapter 2. Improved browsing in samba</H1
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN2517"
|
||||
NAME="AEN229"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>15.1. Overview of browsing</H1
|
||||
>2.1. Overview of browsing</H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>SMB networking provides a mechanism by which clients can access a list
|
||||
of machines in a network, a so-called "browse list". This list
|
||||
@ -101,9 +104,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN2521"
|
||||
NAME="AEN233"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>15.2. Browsing support in samba</H1
|
||||
>2.2. Browsing support in samba</H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Samba now fully supports browsing. The browsing is supported by nmbd
|
||||
and is also controlled by options in the smb.conf file (see smb.conf(5)).</P
|
||||
@ -146,9 +149,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN2530"
|
||||
NAME="AEN242"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>15.3. Problem resolution</H1
|
||||
>2.3. Problem resolution</H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>If something doesn't work then hopefully the log.nmb file will help
|
||||
you track down the problem. Try a debug level of 2 or 3 for finding
|
||||
@ -180,9 +183,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN2537"
|
||||
NAME="AEN249"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>15.4. Browsing across subnets</H1
|
||||
>2.4. Browsing across subnets</H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>With the release of Samba 1.9.17(alpha1 and above) Samba has been
|
||||
updated to enable it to support the replication of browse lists
|
||||
@ -211,9 +214,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN2542"
|
||||
NAME="AEN254"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>15.4.1. How does cross subnet browsing work ?</H2
|
||||
>2.4.1. How does cross subnet browsing work ?</H2
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Cross subnet browsing is a complicated dance, containing multiple
|
||||
moving parts. It has taken Microsoft several years to get the code
|
||||
@ -423,9 +426,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN2577"
|
||||
NAME="AEN289"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>15.5. Setting up a WINS server</H1
|
||||
>2.5. Setting up a WINS server</H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Either a Samba machine or a Windows NT Server machine may be set up
|
||||
as a WINS server. To set a Samba machine to be a WINS server you must
|
||||
@ -477,7 +480,7 @@ all smb.conf files :</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
><B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
> wins server = >name or IP address<</B
|
||||
>wins server = >name or IP address<</B
|
||||
></P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>where >name or IP address< is either the DNS name of the WINS server
|
||||
@ -506,9 +509,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN2596"
|
||||
NAME="AEN308"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>15.6. Setting up Browsing in a WORKGROUP</H1
|
||||
>2.6. Setting up Browsing in a WORKGROUP</H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>To set up cross subnet browsing on a network containing machines
|
||||
in up to be in a WORKGROUP, not an NT Domain you need to set up one
|
||||
@ -529,7 +532,7 @@ set the following option in the [global] section of the smb.conf file :</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
><B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
> domain master = yes</B
|
||||
>domain master = yes</B
|
||||
></P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>The domain master browser should also preferrably be the local master
|
||||
@ -590,9 +593,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN2614"
|
||||
NAME="AEN326"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>15.7. Setting up Browsing in a DOMAIN</H1
|
||||
>2.7. Setting up Browsing in a DOMAIN</H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>If you are adding Samba servers to a Windows NT Domain then
|
||||
you must not set up a Samba server as a domain master browser.
|
||||
@ -641,9 +644,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN2624"
|
||||
NAME="AEN336"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>15.8. Forcing samba to be the master</H1
|
||||
>2.8. Forcing samba to be the master</H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Who becomes the "master browser" is determined by an election process
|
||||
using broadcasts. Each election packet contains a number of parameters
|
||||
@ -689,9 +692,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN2633"
|
||||
NAME="AEN345"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>15.9. Making samba the domain master</H1
|
||||
>2.9. Making samba the domain master</H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>The domain master is responsible for collating the browse lists of
|
||||
multiple subnets so that browsing can occur between subnets. You can
|
||||
@ -762,9 +765,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN2651"
|
||||
NAME="AEN363"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>15.10. Note about broadcast addresses</H1
|
||||
>2.10. Note about broadcast addresses</H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>If your network uses a "0" based broadcast address (for example if it
|
||||
ends in a 0) then you will strike problems. Windows for Workgroups
|
||||
@ -776,9 +779,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN2654"
|
||||
NAME="AEN366"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>15.11. Multiple interfaces</H1
|
||||
>2.11. Multiple interfaces</H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Samba now supports machines with multiple network interfaces. If you
|
||||
have multiple interfaces then you will need to use the "interfaces"
|
||||
@ -801,7 +804,7 @@ WIDTH="33%"
|
||||
ALIGN="left"
|
||||
VALIGN="top"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
HREF="ads.html"
|
||||
HREF="install.html"
|
||||
ACCESSKEY="P"
|
||||
>Prev</A
|
||||
></TD
|
||||
@ -819,7 +822,7 @@ WIDTH="33%"
|
||||
ALIGN="right"
|
||||
VALIGN="top"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
HREF="browsing-quick.html"
|
||||
HREF="oplocks.html"
|
||||
ACCESSKEY="N"
|
||||
>Next</A
|
||||
></TD
|
||||
@ -829,17 +832,21 @@ ACCESSKEY="N"
|
||||
WIDTH="33%"
|
||||
ALIGN="left"
|
||||
VALIGN="top"
|
||||
>Using samba 3.0 with ActiveDirectory support</TD
|
||||
>How to Install and Test SAMBA</TD
|
||||
><TD
|
||||
WIDTH="34%"
|
||||
ALIGN="center"
|
||||
VALIGN="top"
|
||||
> </TD
|
||||
><A
|
||||
HREF="introduction.html"
|
||||
ACCESSKEY="U"
|
||||
>Up</A
|
||||
></TD
|
||||
><TD
|
||||
WIDTH="33%"
|
||||
ALIGN="right"
|
||||
VALIGN="top"
|
||||
>Quick Cross Subnet Browsing / Cross Workgroup Browsing guide</TD
|
||||
>Oplocks</TD
|
||||
></TR
|
||||
></TABLE
|
||||
></DIV
|
||||
|
@ -9,12 +9,15 @@ CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.77"><LINK
|
||||
REL="HOME"
|
||||
TITLE="SAMBA Project Documentation"
|
||||
HREF="samba-howto-collection.html"><LINK
|
||||
REL="UP"
|
||||
TITLE="General installation"
|
||||
HREF="introduction.html"><LINK
|
||||
REL="PREVIOUS"
|
||||
TITLE="SAMBA Project Documentation"
|
||||
HREF="samba-howto-collection.html"><LINK
|
||||
TITLE="General installation"
|
||||
HREF="introduction.html"><LINK
|
||||
REL="NEXT"
|
||||
TITLE="Integrating MS Windows networks with Samba"
|
||||
HREF="integrate-ms-networks.html"></HEAD
|
||||
TITLE="Improved browsing in samba"
|
||||
HREF="improved-browsing.html"></HEAD
|
||||
><BODY
|
||||
CLASS="CHAPTER"
|
||||
BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF"
|
||||
@ -42,7 +45,7 @@ WIDTH="10%"
|
||||
ALIGN="left"
|
||||
VALIGN="bottom"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
HREF="samba-howto-collection.html"
|
||||
HREF="introduction.html"
|
||||
ACCESSKEY="P"
|
||||
>Prev</A
|
||||
></TD
|
||||
@ -56,7 +59,7 @@ WIDTH="10%"
|
||||
ALIGN="right"
|
||||
VALIGN="bottom"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
HREF="integrate-ms-networks.html"
|
||||
HREF="improved-browsing.html"
|
||||
ACCESSKEY="N"
|
||||
>Next</A
|
||||
></TD
|
||||
@ -77,9 +80,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN20"
|
||||
NAME="AEN26"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>1.1. Step 0: Read the man pages</H1
|
||||
>1.1. Read the man pages</H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>The man pages distributed with SAMBA contain
|
||||
lots of useful info that will help to get you started.
|
||||
@ -92,10 +95,20 @@ CLASS="PROMPT"
|
||||
><TT
|
||||
CLASS="USERINPUT"
|
||||
><B
|
||||
>man smbd.8</B
|
||||
></TT
|
||||
>
|
||||
or
|
||||
<TT
|
||||
CLASS="PROMPT"
|
||||
>$ </TT
|
||||
><TT
|
||||
CLASS="USERINPUT"
|
||||
><B
|
||||
>nroff -man smbd.8 | more
|
||||
</B
|
||||
></TT
|
||||
></P
|
||||
> on older unixes.</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Other sources of information are pointed to
|
||||
by the Samba web site,<A
|
||||
@ -109,9 +122,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN28"
|
||||
NAME="AEN36"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>1.2. Step 1: Building the Binaries</H1
|
||||
>1.2. Building the Binaries</H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>To do this, first run the program <B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
@ -208,9 +221,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN56"
|
||||
NAME="AEN64"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>1.3. Step 2: The all important step</H1
|
||||
>1.3. The all important step</H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>At this stage you must fetch yourself a
|
||||
coffee or other drink you find stimulating. Getting the rest
|
||||
@ -225,9 +238,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN60"
|
||||
NAME="AEN68"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>1.4. Step 3: Create the smb configuration file.</H1
|
||||
>1.4. Create the smb configuration file.</H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>There are sample configuration files in the examples
|
||||
subdirectory in the distribution. I suggest you read them
|
||||
@ -281,9 +294,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN74"
|
||||
NAME="AEN82"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>1.5. Step 4: Test your config file with
|
||||
>1.5. Test your config file with
|
||||
<B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>testparm</B
|
||||
@ -299,15 +312,21 @@ CLASS="FILENAME"
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Make sure it runs OK and that the services look
|
||||
reasonable before proceeding. </P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Always run testparm again when you change
|
||||
<TT
|
||||
CLASS="FILENAME"
|
||||
>smb.conf</TT
|
||||
>!</P
|
||||
></DIV
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN80"
|
||||
NAME="AEN90"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>1.6. Step 5: Starting the smbd and nmbd</H1
|
||||
>1.6. Starting the smbd and nmbd</H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>You must choose to start smbd and nmbd either
|
||||
as daemons or from <B
|
||||
@ -345,9 +364,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN90"
|
||||
NAME="AEN100"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>1.6.1. Step 5a: Starting from inetd.conf</H2
|
||||
>1.6.1. Starting from inetd.conf</H2
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>NOTE; The following will be different if
|
||||
you use NIS or NIS+ to distributed services maps.</P
|
||||
@ -449,9 +468,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN119"
|
||||
NAME="AEN129"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>1.6.2. Step 5b. Alternative: starting it as a daemon</H2
|
||||
>1.6.2. Alternative: starting it as a daemon</H2
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>To start the server as a daemon you should create
|
||||
a script something like this one, perhaps calling
|
||||
@ -506,9 +525,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN135"
|
||||
NAME="AEN145"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>1.7. Step 6: Try listing the shares available on your
|
||||
>1.7. Try listing the shares available on your
|
||||
server</H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
><TT
|
||||
@ -547,9 +566,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN144"
|
||||
NAME="AEN154"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>1.8. Step 7: Try connecting with the unix client</H1
|
||||
>1.8. Try connecting with the unix client</H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
><TT
|
||||
CLASS="PROMPT"
|
||||
@ -610,9 +629,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN160"
|
||||
NAME="AEN170"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>1.9. Step 8: Try connecting from a DOS, WfWg, Win9x, WinNT,
|
||||
>1.9. Try connecting from a DOS, WfWg, Win9x, WinNT,
|
||||
Win2k, OS/2, etc... client</H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Try mounting disks. eg:</P
|
||||
@ -659,7 +678,7 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN174"
|
||||
NAME="AEN184"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>1.10. What If Things Don't Work?</H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
@ -682,15 +701,16 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN179"
|
||||
NAME="AEN189"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>1.10.1. Diagnosing Problems</H2
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>If you have installation problems then go to
|
||||
<TT
|
||||
CLASS="FILENAME"
|
||||
>DIAGNOSIS.txt</TT
|
||||
> to try to find the
|
||||
>If you have installation problems then go to the
|
||||
<A
|
||||
HREF="Diagnosis.html"
|
||||
TARGET="_top"
|
||||
>Diagnosis</A
|
||||
> chapter to try to find the
|
||||
problem.</P
|
||||
></DIV
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
@ -698,7 +718,7 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN183"
|
||||
NAME="AEN193"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>1.10.2. Scope IDs</H2
|
||||
><P
|
||||
@ -714,7 +734,7 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN186"
|
||||
NAME="AEN196"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>1.10.3. Choosing the Protocol Level</H2
|
||||
><P
|
||||
@ -755,7 +775,7 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN195"
|
||||
NAME="AEN205"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>1.10.4. Printing from UNIX to a Client PC</H2
|
||||
><P
|
||||
@ -776,7 +796,7 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN200"
|
||||
NAME="AEN210"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>1.10.5. Locking</H2
|
||||
><P
|
||||
@ -836,7 +856,7 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN209"
|
||||
NAME="AEN219"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>1.10.6. Mapping Usernames</H2
|
||||
><P
|
||||
@ -862,7 +882,7 @@ WIDTH="33%"
|
||||
ALIGN="left"
|
||||
VALIGN="top"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
HREF="samba-howto-collection.html"
|
||||
HREF="introduction.html"
|
||||
ACCESSKEY="P"
|
||||
>Prev</A
|
||||
></TD
|
||||
@ -880,7 +900,7 @@ WIDTH="33%"
|
||||
ALIGN="right"
|
||||
VALIGN="top"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
HREF="integrate-ms-networks.html"
|
||||
HREF="improved-browsing.html"
|
||||
ACCESSKEY="N"
|
||||
>Next</A
|
||||
></TD
|
||||
@ -890,17 +910,21 @@ ACCESSKEY="N"
|
||||
WIDTH="33%"
|
||||
ALIGN="left"
|
||||
VALIGN="top"
|
||||
>SAMBA Project Documentation</TD
|
||||
>General installation</TD
|
||||
><TD
|
||||
WIDTH="34%"
|
||||
ALIGN="center"
|
||||
VALIGN="top"
|
||||
> </TD
|
||||
><A
|
||||
HREF="introduction.html"
|
||||
ACCESSKEY="U"
|
||||
>Up</A
|
||||
></TD
|
||||
><TD
|
||||
WIDTH="33%"
|
||||
ALIGN="right"
|
||||
VALIGN="top"
|
||||
>Integrating MS Windows networks with Samba</TD
|
||||
>Improved browsing in samba</TD
|
||||
></TR
|
||||
></TABLE
|
||||
></DIV
|
||||
|
@ -9,13 +9,15 @@ CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.77"><LINK
|
||||
REL="HOME"
|
||||
TITLE="SAMBA Project Documentation"
|
||||
HREF="samba-howto-collection.html"><LINK
|
||||
REL="UP"
|
||||
TITLE="Optional configuration"
|
||||
HREF="optional.html"><LINK
|
||||
REL="PREVIOUS"
|
||||
TITLE="How to Install and Test SAMBA"
|
||||
HREF="install.html"><LINK
|
||||
TITLE="Optional configuration"
|
||||
HREF="optional.html"><LINK
|
||||
REL="NEXT"
|
||||
TITLE="Configuring PAM for distributed but centrally
|
||||
managed authentication"
|
||||
HREF="pam.html"></HEAD
|
||||
TITLE="UNIX Permission Bits and Windows NT Access Control Lists"
|
||||
HREF="unix-permissions.html"></HEAD
|
||||
><BODY
|
||||
CLASS="CHAPTER"
|
||||
BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF"
|
||||
@ -43,7 +45,7 @@ WIDTH="10%"
|
||||
ALIGN="left"
|
||||
VALIGN="bottom"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
HREF="install.html"
|
||||
HREF="optional.html"
|
||||
ACCESSKEY="P"
|
||||
>Prev</A
|
||||
></TD
|
||||
@ -57,7 +59,7 @@ WIDTH="10%"
|
||||
ALIGN="right"
|
||||
VALIGN="bottom"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
HREF="pam.html"
|
||||
HREF="unix-permissions.html"
|
||||
ACCESSKEY="N"
|
||||
>Next</A
|
||||
></TD
|
||||
@ -72,15 +74,15 @@ CLASS="CHAPTER"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="INTEGRATE-MS-NETWORKS"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>Chapter 2. Integrating MS Windows networks with Samba</H1
|
||||
>Chapter 11. Integrating MS Windows networks with Samba</H1
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN223"
|
||||
NAME="AEN1387"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>2.1. Agenda</H1
|
||||
>11.1. Agenda</H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>To identify the key functional mechanisms of MS Windows networking
|
||||
to enable the deployment of Samba as a means of extending and/or
|
||||
@ -145,9 +147,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN245"
|
||||
NAME="AEN1409"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>2.2. Name Resolution in a pure Unix/Linux world</H1
|
||||
>11.2. Name Resolution in a pure Unix/Linux world</H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>The key configuration files covered in this section are:</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
@ -187,9 +189,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN261"
|
||||
NAME="AEN1425"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>2.2.1. <TT
|
||||
>11.2.1. <TT
|
||||
CLASS="FILENAME"
|
||||
>/etc/hosts</TT
|
||||
></H2
|
||||
@ -268,9 +270,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN277"
|
||||
NAME="AEN1441"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>2.2.2. <TT
|
||||
>11.2.2. <TT
|
||||
CLASS="FILENAME"
|
||||
>/etc/resolv.conf</TT
|
||||
></H2
|
||||
@ -306,9 +308,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN288"
|
||||
NAME="AEN1452"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>2.2.3. <TT
|
||||
>11.2.3. <TT
|
||||
CLASS="FILENAME"
|
||||
>/etc/host.conf</TT
|
||||
></H2
|
||||
@ -335,9 +337,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN296"
|
||||
NAME="AEN1460"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>2.2.4. <TT
|
||||
>11.2.4. <TT
|
||||
CLASS="FILENAME"
|
||||
>/etc/nsswitch.conf</TT
|
||||
></H2
|
||||
@ -376,7 +378,7 @@ facilities and/or services are correctly configured.</P
|
||||
sent, TCP/IP networks are silent. All TCP/IP communications assumes a
|
||||
principal of speaking only when necessary.</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Samba version 2.2.0 will add Linux support for extensions to
|
||||
>Starting with version 2.2.0 samba has Linux support for extensions to
|
||||
the name service switch infrastructure so that linux clients will
|
||||
be able to obtain resolution of MS Windows NetBIOS names to IP
|
||||
Addresses. To gain this functionality Samba needs to be compiled
|
||||
@ -404,9 +406,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN308"
|
||||
NAME="AEN1472"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>2.3. Name resolution as used within MS Windows networking</H1
|
||||
>11.3. Name resolution as used within MS Windows networking</H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>MS Windows networking is predicated about the name each machine
|
||||
is given. This name is known variously (and inconsistently) as
|
||||
@ -489,9 +491,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN320"
|
||||
NAME="AEN1484"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>2.3.1. The NetBIOS Name Cache</H2
|
||||
>11.3.1. The NetBIOS Name Cache</H2
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>All MS Windows machines employ an in memory buffer in which is
|
||||
stored the NetBIOS names and IP addresses for all external
|
||||
@ -516,9 +518,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN325"
|
||||
NAME="AEN1489"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>2.3.2. The LMHOSTS file</H2
|
||||
>11.3.2. The LMHOSTS file</H2
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>This file is usually located in MS Windows NT 4.0 or
|
||||
2000 in <TT
|
||||
@ -619,9 +621,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN333"
|
||||
NAME="AEN1497"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>2.3.3. HOSTS file</H2
|
||||
>11.3.3. HOSTS file</H2
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>This file is usually located in MS Windows NT 4.0 or 2000 in
|
||||
<TT
|
||||
@ -641,9 +643,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN338"
|
||||
NAME="AEN1502"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>2.3.4. DNS Lookup</H2
|
||||
>11.3.4. DNS Lookup</H2
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>This capability is configured in the TCP/IP setup area in the network
|
||||
configuration facility. If enabled an elaborate name resolution sequence
|
||||
@ -661,9 +663,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN341"
|
||||
NAME="AEN1505"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>2.3.5. WINS Lookup</H2
|
||||
>11.3.5. WINS Lookup</H2
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>A WINS (Windows Internet Name Server) service is the equivaent of the
|
||||
rfc1001/1002 specified NBNS (NetBIOS Name Server). A WINS server stores
|
||||
@ -704,9 +706,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN353"
|
||||
NAME="AEN1517"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>2.4. How browsing functions and how to deploy stable and
|
||||
>11.4. How browsing functions and how to deploy stable and
|
||||
dependable browsing using Samba</H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>As stated above, MS Windows machines register their NetBIOS names
|
||||
@ -771,9 +773,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN363"
|
||||
NAME="AEN1527"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>2.5. MS Windows security options and how to configure
|
||||
>11.5. MS Windows security options and how to configure
|
||||
Samba for seemless integration</H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>MS Windows clients may use encrypted passwords as part of a
|
||||
@ -908,9 +910,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN391"
|
||||
NAME="AEN1555"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>2.5.1. Use MS Windows NT as an authentication server</H2
|
||||
>11.5.1. Use MS Windows NT as an authentication server</H2
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>This method involves the additions of the following parameters
|
||||
in the smb.conf file:</P
|
||||
@ -944,9 +946,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN399"
|
||||
NAME="AEN1563"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>2.5.2. Make Samba a member of an MS Windows NT security domain</H2
|
||||
>11.5.2. Make Samba a member of an MS Windows NT security domain</H2
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>This method involves additon of the following paramters in the smb.conf file:</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
@ -1007,9 +1009,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN416"
|
||||
NAME="AEN1580"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>2.5.3. Configure Samba as an authentication server</H2
|
||||
>11.5.3. Configure Samba as an authentication server</H2
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>This mode of authentication demands that there be on the
|
||||
Unix/Linux system both a Unix style account as well as an
|
||||
@ -1044,9 +1046,9 @@ CLASS="SECT3"
|
||||
><H3
|
||||
CLASS="SECT3"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN423"
|
||||
NAME="AEN1587"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>2.5.3.1. Users</H3
|
||||
>11.5.3.1. Users</H3
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>A user account that may provide a home directory should be
|
||||
created. The following Linux system commands are typical of
|
||||
@ -1067,9 +1069,9 @@ CLASS="SECT3"
|
||||
><H3
|
||||
CLASS="SECT3"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN428"
|
||||
NAME="AEN1592"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>2.5.3.2. MS Windows NT Machine Accounts</H3
|
||||
>11.5.3.2. MS Windows NT Machine Accounts</H3
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>These are required only when Samba is used as a domain
|
||||
controller. Refer to the Samba-PDC-HOWTO for more details.</P
|
||||
@ -1088,9 +1090,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN433"
|
||||
NAME="AEN1597"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>2.6. Conclusions</H1
|
||||
>11.6. Conclusions</H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Samba provides a flexible means to operate as...</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
@ -1136,7 +1138,7 @@ WIDTH="33%"
|
||||
ALIGN="left"
|
||||
VALIGN="top"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
HREF="install.html"
|
||||
HREF="optional.html"
|
||||
ACCESSKEY="P"
|
||||
>Prev</A
|
||||
></TD
|
||||
@ -1154,7 +1156,7 @@ WIDTH="33%"
|
||||
ALIGN="right"
|
||||
VALIGN="top"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
HREF="pam.html"
|
||||
HREF="unix-permissions.html"
|
||||
ACCESSKEY="N"
|
||||
>Next</A
|
||||
></TD
|
||||
@ -1164,18 +1166,21 @@ ACCESSKEY="N"
|
||||
WIDTH="33%"
|
||||
ALIGN="left"
|
||||
VALIGN="top"
|
||||
>How to Install and Test SAMBA</TD
|
||||
>Optional configuration</TD
|
||||
><TD
|
||||
WIDTH="34%"
|
||||
ALIGN="center"
|
||||
VALIGN="top"
|
||||
> </TD
|
||||
><A
|
||||
HREF="optional.html"
|
||||
ACCESSKEY="U"
|
||||
>Up</A
|
||||
></TD
|
||||
><TD
|
||||
WIDTH="33%"
|
||||
ALIGN="right"
|
||||
VALIGN="top"
|
||||
>Configuring PAM for distributed but centrally
|
||||
managed authentication</TD
|
||||
>UNIX Permission Bits and Windows NT Access Control Lists</TD
|
||||
></TR
|
||||
></TABLE
|
||||
></DIV
|
||||
|
@ -9,13 +9,16 @@ CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.77"><LINK
|
||||
REL="HOME"
|
||||
TITLE="SAMBA Project Documentation"
|
||||
HREF="samba-howto-collection.html"><LINK
|
||||
REL="UP"
|
||||
TITLE="Optional configuration"
|
||||
HREF="optional.html"><LINK
|
||||
REL="PREVIOUS"
|
||||
TITLE="Configuring PAM for distributed but centrally
|
||||
managed authentication"
|
||||
HREF="pam.html"><LINK
|
||||
REL="NEXT"
|
||||
TITLE="UNIX Permission Bits and Windows NT Access Control Lists"
|
||||
HREF="unix-permissions.html"></HEAD
|
||||
TITLE="Printing Support"
|
||||
HREF="printing.html"></HEAD
|
||||
><BODY
|
||||
CLASS="CHAPTER"
|
||||
BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF"
|
||||
@ -57,7 +60,7 @@ WIDTH="10%"
|
||||
ALIGN="right"
|
||||
VALIGN="bottom"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
HREF="unix-permissions.html"
|
||||
HREF="printing.html"
|
||||
ACCESSKEY="N"
|
||||
>Next</A
|
||||
></TD
|
||||
@ -72,15 +75,15 @@ CLASS="CHAPTER"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="MSDFS"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>Chapter 4. Hosting a Microsoft Distributed File System tree on Samba</H1
|
||||
>Chapter 14. Hosting a Microsoft Distributed File System tree on Samba</H1
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN525"
|
||||
NAME="AEN1872"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>4.1. Instructions</H1
|
||||
>14.1. Instructions</H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>The Distributed File System (or Dfs) provides a means of
|
||||
separating the logical view of files and directories that users
|
||||
@ -226,9 +229,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN560"
|
||||
NAME="AEN1907"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>4.1.1. Notes</H2
|
||||
>14.1.1. Notes</H2
|
||||
><P
|
||||
></P
|
||||
><UL
|
||||
@ -289,7 +292,7 @@ WIDTH="33%"
|
||||
ALIGN="right"
|
||||
VALIGN="top"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
HREF="unix-permissions.html"
|
||||
HREF="printing.html"
|
||||
ACCESSKEY="N"
|
||||
>Next</A
|
||||
></TD
|
||||
@ -305,12 +308,16 @@ managed authentication</TD
|
||||
WIDTH="34%"
|
||||
ALIGN="center"
|
||||
VALIGN="top"
|
||||
> </TD
|
||||
><A
|
||||
HREF="optional.html"
|
||||
ACCESSKEY="U"
|
||||
>Up</A
|
||||
></TD
|
||||
><TD
|
||||
WIDTH="33%"
|
||||
ALIGN="right"
|
||||
VALIGN="top"
|
||||
>UNIX Permission Bits and Windows NT Access Control Lists</TD
|
||||
>Printing Support</TD
|
||||
></TR
|
||||
></TABLE
|
||||
></DIV
|
||||
|
@ -38,12 +38,12 @@ NAME="AEN8"
|
||||
><B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>nmblookup</B
|
||||
> [-M] [-R] [-S] [-r] [-A] [-h] [-B <broadcast address>] [-U <unicast address>] [-d <debug level>] [-s <smb config file>] [-i <NetBIOS scope>] [-T] {name}</P
|
||||
> [-M] [-R] [-S] [-r] [-A] [-h] [-B <broadcast address>] [-U <unicast address>] [-d <debug level>] [-s <smb config file>] [-i <NetBIOS scope>] [-T] [-f] {name}</P
|
||||
></DIV
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="REFSECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN24"
|
||||
NAME="AEN25"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
>DESCRIPTION</H2
|
||||
@ -66,7 +66,7 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="REFSECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN30"
|
||||
NAME="AEN31"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
>OPTIONS</H2
|
||||
@ -286,6 +286,15 @@ CLASS="EMPHASIS"
|
||||
> pair that is the normal output.</P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>-f</DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
> Show which flags apply to the name that has been looked up. Possible
|
||||
answers are zero or more of: Response, Authoritative,
|
||||
Truncated, Recursion_Desired, Recursion_Available, Broadcast.
|
||||
</P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>name</DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
@ -302,7 +311,7 @@ CLASS="EMPHASIS"
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="REFSECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN110"
|
||||
NAME="AEN115"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
>EXAMPLES</H2
|
||||
@ -339,18 +348,18 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="REFSECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN122"
|
||||
NAME="AEN127"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
>VERSION</H2
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>This man page is correct for version 2.2 of
|
||||
>This man page is correct for version 3.0 of
|
||||
the Samba suite.</P
|
||||
></DIV
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="REFSECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN125"
|
||||
NAME="AEN130"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
>SEE ALSO</H2
|
||||
@ -377,7 +386,7 @@ TARGET="_top"
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="REFSECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN132"
|
||||
NAME="AEN137"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
>AUTHOR</H2
|
||||
|
@ -9,12 +9,15 @@ CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.77"><LINK
|
||||
REL="HOME"
|
||||
TITLE="SAMBA Project Documentation"
|
||||
HREF="samba-howto-collection.html"><LINK
|
||||
REL="UP"
|
||||
TITLE="Appendixes"
|
||||
HREF="appendixes.html"><LINK
|
||||
REL="PREVIOUS"
|
||||
TITLE="Portability"
|
||||
HREF="portability.html"><LINK
|
||||
REL="NEXT"
|
||||
TITLE="Diagnosing your samba server"
|
||||
HREF="diagnosis.html"></HEAD
|
||||
TITLE="Reporting Bugs"
|
||||
HREF="bugreport.html"></HEAD
|
||||
><BODY
|
||||
CLASS="CHAPTER"
|
||||
BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF"
|
||||
@ -56,7 +59,7 @@ WIDTH="10%"
|
||||
ALIGN="right"
|
||||
VALIGN="bottom"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
HREF="diagnosis.html"
|
||||
HREF="bugreport.html"
|
||||
ACCESSKEY="N"
|
||||
>Next</A
|
||||
></TD
|
||||
@ -71,7 +74,7 @@ CLASS="CHAPTER"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="OTHER-CLIENTS"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>Chapter 22. Samba and other CIFS clients</H1
|
||||
>Chapter 25. Samba and other CIFS clients</H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>This chapter contains client-specific information.</P
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
@ -79,9 +82,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN3070"
|
||||
NAME="AEN3258"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>22.1. Macintosh clients?</H1
|
||||
>25.1. Macintosh clients?</H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Yes. <A
|
||||
HREF="http://www.thursby.com/"
|
||||
@ -125,17 +128,17 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN3079"
|
||||
NAME="AEN3267"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>22.2. OS2 Client</H1
|
||||
>25.2. OS2 Client</H1
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN3081"
|
||||
NAME="AEN3269"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>22.2.1. How can I configure OS/2 Warp Connect or
|
||||
>25.2.1. How can I configure OS/2 Warp Connect or
|
||||
OS/2 Warp 4 as a client for Samba?</H2
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>A more complete answer to this question can be
|
||||
@ -192,9 +195,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN3096"
|
||||
NAME="AEN3284"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>22.2.2. How can I configure OS/2 Warp 3 (not Connect),
|
||||
>25.2.2. How can I configure OS/2 Warp 3 (not Connect),
|
||||
OS/2 1.2, 1.3 or 2.x for Samba?</H2
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>You can use the free Microsoft LAN Manager 2.2c Client
|
||||
@ -236,9 +239,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN3105"
|
||||
NAME="AEN3293"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>22.2.3. Are there any other issues when OS/2 (any version)
|
||||
>25.2.3. Are there any other issues when OS/2 (any version)
|
||||
is used as a client?</H2
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>When you do a NET VIEW or use the "File and Print
|
||||
@ -258,9 +261,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN3109"
|
||||
NAME="AEN3297"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>22.2.4. How do I get printer driver download working
|
||||
>25.2.4. How do I get printer driver download working
|
||||
for OS/2 clients?</H2
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>First, create a share called [PRINTDRV] that is
|
||||
@ -309,17 +312,17 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN3119"
|
||||
NAME="AEN3307"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>22.3. Windows for Workgroups</H1
|
||||
>25.3. Windows for Workgroups</H1
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN3121"
|
||||
NAME="AEN3309"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>22.3.1. Use latest TCP/IP stack from Microsoft</H2
|
||||
>25.3.1. Use latest TCP/IP stack from Microsoft</H2
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Use the latest TCP/IP stack from microsoft if you use Windows
|
||||
for workgroups.</P
|
||||
@ -339,9 +342,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN3126"
|
||||
NAME="AEN3314"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>22.3.2. Delete .pwl files after password change</H2
|
||||
>25.3.2. Delete .pwl files after password change</H2
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>WfWg does a lousy job with passwords. I find that if I change my
|
||||
password on either the unix box or the PC the safest thing to do is to
|
||||
@ -359,9 +362,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN3131"
|
||||
NAME="AEN3319"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>22.3.3. Configure WfW password handling</H2
|
||||
>25.3.3. Configure WfW password handling</H2
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>There is a program call admincfg.exe
|
||||
on the last disk (disk 8) of the WFW 3.11 disk set. To install it
|
||||
@ -378,9 +381,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN3135"
|
||||
NAME="AEN3323"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>22.3.4. Case handling of passwords</H2
|
||||
>25.3.4. Case handling of passwords</H2
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Windows for Workgroups uppercases the password before sending it to the server. Unix passwords can be case-sensitive though. Check the <A
|
||||
HREF="smb.conf.5.html"
|
||||
@ -397,9 +400,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN3140"
|
||||
NAME="AEN3328"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>22.4. Windows '95/'98</H1
|
||||
>25.4. Windows '95/'98</H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>When using Windows 95 OEM SR2 the following updates are recommended where Samba
|
||||
is being used. Please NOTE that the above change will affect you once these
|
||||
@ -445,9 +448,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN3156"
|
||||
NAME="AEN3344"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>22.5. Windows 2000 Service Pack 2</H1
|
||||
>25.5. Windows 2000 Service Pack 2</H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>
|
||||
There are several annoyances with Windows 2000 SP2. One of which
|
||||
@ -557,7 +560,7 @@ WIDTH="33%"
|
||||
ALIGN="right"
|
||||
VALIGN="top"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
HREF="diagnosis.html"
|
||||
HREF="bugreport.html"
|
||||
ACCESSKEY="N"
|
||||
>Next</A
|
||||
></TD
|
||||
@ -572,12 +575,16 @@ VALIGN="top"
|
||||
WIDTH="34%"
|
||||
ALIGN="center"
|
||||
VALIGN="top"
|
||||
> </TD
|
||||
><A
|
||||
HREF="appendixes.html"
|
||||
ACCESSKEY="U"
|
||||
>Up</A
|
||||
></TD
|
||||
><TD
|
||||
WIDTH="33%"
|
||||
ALIGN="right"
|
||||
VALIGN="top"
|
||||
>Diagnosing your samba server</TD
|
||||
>Reporting Bugs</TD
|
||||
></TR
|
||||
></TABLE
|
||||
></DIV
|
||||
|
@ -10,9 +10,12 @@ CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.77"><LINK
|
||||
REL="HOME"
|
||||
TITLE="SAMBA Project Documentation"
|
||||
HREF="samba-howto-collection.html"><LINK
|
||||
REL="UP"
|
||||
TITLE="Optional configuration"
|
||||
HREF="optional.html"><LINK
|
||||
REL="PREVIOUS"
|
||||
TITLE="Integrating MS Windows networks with Samba"
|
||||
HREF="integrate-ms-networks.html"><LINK
|
||||
TITLE="UNIX Permission Bits and Windows NT Access Control Lists"
|
||||
HREF="unix-permissions.html"><LINK
|
||||
REL="NEXT"
|
||||
TITLE="Hosting a Microsoft Distributed File System tree on Samba"
|
||||
HREF="msdfs.html"></HEAD
|
||||
@ -43,7 +46,7 @@ WIDTH="10%"
|
||||
ALIGN="left"
|
||||
VALIGN="bottom"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
HREF="integrate-ms-networks.html"
|
||||
HREF="unix-permissions.html"
|
||||
ACCESSKEY="P"
|
||||
>Prev</A
|
||||
></TD
|
||||
@ -72,16 +75,16 @@ CLASS="CHAPTER"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="PAM"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>Chapter 3. Configuring PAM for distributed but centrally
|
||||
>Chapter 13. Configuring PAM for distributed but centrally
|
||||
managed authentication</H1
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN454"
|
||||
NAME="AEN1801"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>3.1. Samba and PAM</H1
|
||||
>13.1. Samba and PAM</H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>A number of Unix systems (eg: Sun Solaris), as well as the
|
||||
xxxxBSD family and Linux, now utilize the Pluggable Authentication
|
||||
@ -293,9 +296,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN498"
|
||||
NAME="AEN1845"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>3.2. Distributed Authentication</H1
|
||||
>13.2. Distributed Authentication</H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>The astute administrator will realize from this that the
|
||||
combination of <TT
|
||||
@ -326,9 +329,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN505"
|
||||
NAME="AEN1852"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>3.3. PAM Configuration in smb.conf</H1
|
||||
>13.3. PAM Configuration in smb.conf</H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>There is an option in smb.conf called <A
|
||||
HREF="smb.conf.5.html#OBEYPAMRESTRICTIONS"
|
||||
@ -378,7 +381,7 @@ WIDTH="33%"
|
||||
ALIGN="left"
|
||||
VALIGN="top"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
HREF="integrate-ms-networks.html"
|
||||
HREF="unix-permissions.html"
|
||||
ACCESSKEY="P"
|
||||
>Prev</A
|
||||
></TD
|
||||
@ -406,12 +409,16 @@ ACCESSKEY="N"
|
||||
WIDTH="33%"
|
||||
ALIGN="left"
|
||||
VALIGN="top"
|
||||
>Integrating MS Windows networks with Samba</TD
|
||||
>UNIX Permission Bits and Windows NT Access Control Lists</TD
|
||||
><TD
|
||||
WIDTH="34%"
|
||||
ALIGN="center"
|
||||
VALIGN="top"
|
||||
> </TD
|
||||
><A
|
||||
HREF="optional.html"
|
||||
ACCESSKEY="U"
|
||||
>Up</A
|
||||
></TD
|
||||
><TD
|
||||
WIDTH="33%"
|
||||
ALIGN="right"
|
||||
|
@ -444,13 +444,80 @@ CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING"
|
||||
></TABLE
|
||||
></P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>-d|--debug=debuglevel</DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
><TT
|
||||
CLASS="REPLACEABLE"
|
||||
><I
|
||||
>debuglevel</I
|
||||
></TT
|
||||
> is an integer
|
||||
from 0 to 10. The default value if this parameter is
|
||||
not specified is zero.</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>The higher this value, the more detail will be
|
||||
logged to the log files about the activities of the
|
||||
server. At level 0, only critical errors and serious
|
||||
warnings will be logged. Level 1 is a reasonable level for
|
||||
day to day running - it generates a small amount of
|
||||
information about operations carried out.</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Levels above 1 will generate considerable
|
||||
amounts of log data, and should only be used when
|
||||
investigating a problem. Levels above 3 are designed for
|
||||
use only by developers and generate HUGE amounts of log
|
||||
data, most of which is extremely cryptic.</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Note that specifying this parameter here will
|
||||
override the <A
|
||||
HREF="smb.conf.5.html#loglevel"
|
||||
TARGET="_top"
|
||||
>log
|
||||
level</A
|
||||
> parameter in the <A
|
||||
HREF="smb.conf.5.html"
|
||||
TARGET="_top"
|
||||
><TT
|
||||
CLASS="FILENAME"
|
||||
>smb.conf(5)</TT
|
||||
></A
|
||||
> file.</P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>-h|--help</DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Print a summary of command line options.</P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>-s <configuration file></DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>The file specified contains the
|
||||
configuration details required by the server. The
|
||||
information in this file includes server-specific
|
||||
information such as what printcap file to use, as well
|
||||
as descriptions of all the services that the server is
|
||||
to provide. See <A
|
||||
HREF="smb.conf.5.html"
|
||||
TARGET="_top"
|
||||
><TT
|
||||
CLASS="FILENAME"
|
||||
>smb.conf(5)</TT
|
||||
></A
|
||||
> for more information.
|
||||
The default configuration file name is determined at
|
||||
compile time.</P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
></DL
|
||||
></DIV
|
||||
></DIV
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="REFSECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN161"
|
||||
NAME="AEN182"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
>NOTES</H2
|
||||
@ -460,7 +527,7 @@ NAME="AEN161"
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="REFSECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN164"
|
||||
NAME="AEN185"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
>VERSION</H2
|
||||
@ -471,7 +538,7 @@ NAME="AEN164"
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="REFSECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN167"
|
||||
NAME="AEN188"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
>SEE ALSO</H2
|
||||
@ -491,7 +558,7 @@ TARGET="_top"
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="REFSECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN172"
|
||||
NAME="AEN193"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
>AUTHOR</H2
|
||||
|
@ -9,9 +9,12 @@ CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.77"><LINK
|
||||
REL="HOME"
|
||||
TITLE="SAMBA Project Documentation"
|
||||
HREF="samba-howto-collection.html"><LINK
|
||||
REL="UP"
|
||||
TITLE="Appendixes"
|
||||
HREF="appendixes.html"><LINK
|
||||
REL="PREVIOUS"
|
||||
TITLE="Group mapping HOWTO"
|
||||
HREF="groupmapping.html"><LINK
|
||||
TITLE="Appendixes"
|
||||
HREF="appendixes.html"><LINK
|
||||
REL="NEXT"
|
||||
TITLE="Samba and other CIFS clients"
|
||||
HREF="other-clients.html"></HEAD
|
||||
@ -42,7 +45,7 @@ WIDTH="10%"
|
||||
ALIGN="left"
|
||||
VALIGN="bottom"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
HREF="groupmapping.html"
|
||||
HREF="appendixes.html"
|
||||
ACCESSKEY="P"
|
||||
>Prev</A
|
||||
></TD
|
||||
@ -71,7 +74,7 @@ CLASS="CHAPTER"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="PORTABILITY"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>Chapter 21. Portability</H1
|
||||
>Chapter 24. Portability</H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Samba works on a wide range of platforms but the interface all the
|
||||
platforms provide is not always compatible. This chapter contains
|
||||
@ -81,9 +84,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN3011"
|
||||
NAME="AEN3198"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>21.1. HPUX</H1
|
||||
>24.1. HPUX</H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>HP's implementation of supplementary groups is, er, non-standard (for
|
||||
hysterical reasons). There are two group files, /etc/group and
|
||||
@ -101,15 +104,19 @@ to initgroups() be run as users not in any groups with GIDs outside the
|
||||
allowed range.</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>This is documented in the HP manual pages under setgroups(2) and passwd(4).</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>On HPUX you must use gcc or the HP Ansi compiler. The free compiler
|
||||
that comes with HP-UX is not Ansi compliant and cannot compile
|
||||
Samba.</P
|
||||
></DIV
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN3016"
|
||||
NAME="AEN3204"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>21.2. SCO Unix</H1
|
||||
>24.2. SCO Unix</H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>
|
||||
If you run an old version of SCO Unix then you may need to get important
|
||||
@ -124,9 +131,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN3020"
|
||||
NAME="AEN3208"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>21.3. DNIX</H1
|
||||
>24.3. DNIX</H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>DNIX has a problem with seteuid() and setegid(). These routines are
|
||||
needed for Samba to work correctly, but they were left out of the DNIX
|
||||
@ -231,9 +238,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN3049"
|
||||
NAME="AEN3237"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>21.4. RedHat Linux Rembrandt-II</H1
|
||||
>24.4. RedHat Linux Rembrandt-II</H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>By default RedHat Rembrandt-II during installation adds an
|
||||
entry to /etc/hosts as follows:
|
||||
@ -267,7 +274,7 @@ WIDTH="33%"
|
||||
ALIGN="left"
|
||||
VALIGN="top"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
HREF="groupmapping.html"
|
||||
HREF="appendixes.html"
|
||||
ACCESSKEY="P"
|
||||
>Prev</A
|
||||
></TD
|
||||
@ -295,12 +302,16 @@ ACCESSKEY="N"
|
||||
WIDTH="33%"
|
||||
ALIGN="left"
|
||||
VALIGN="top"
|
||||
>Group mapping HOWTO</TD
|
||||
>Appendixes</TD
|
||||
><TD
|
||||
WIDTH="34%"
|
||||
ALIGN="center"
|
||||
VALIGN="top"
|
||||
> </TD
|
||||
><A
|
||||
HREF="appendixes.html"
|
||||
ACCESSKEY="U"
|
||||
>Up</A
|
||||
></TD
|
||||
><TD
|
||||
WIDTH="33%"
|
||||
ALIGN="right"
|
||||
|
@ -2,19 +2,22 @@
|
||||
<HTML
|
||||
><HEAD
|
||||
><TITLE
|
||||
>Printing Support in Samba 2.2.x</TITLE
|
||||
>Printing Support</TITLE
|
||||
><META
|
||||
NAME="GENERATOR"
|
||||
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.77"><LINK
|
||||
REL="HOME"
|
||||
TITLE="SAMBA Project Documentation"
|
||||
HREF="samba-howto-collection.html"><LINK
|
||||
REL="UP"
|
||||
TITLE="Optional configuration"
|
||||
HREF="optional.html"><LINK
|
||||
REL="PREVIOUS"
|
||||
TITLE="UNIX Permission Bits and Windows NT Access Control Lists"
|
||||
HREF="unix-permissions.html"><LINK
|
||||
TITLE="Hosting a Microsoft Distributed File System tree on Samba"
|
||||
HREF="msdfs.html"><LINK
|
||||
REL="NEXT"
|
||||
TITLE="Debugging Printing Problems"
|
||||
HREF="printingdebug.html"></HEAD
|
||||
TITLE="Unified Logons between Windows NT and UNIX using Winbind"
|
||||
HREF="winbind.html"></HEAD
|
||||
><BODY
|
||||
CLASS="CHAPTER"
|
||||
BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF"
|
||||
@ -42,7 +45,7 @@ WIDTH="10%"
|
||||
ALIGN="left"
|
||||
VALIGN="bottom"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
HREF="unix-permissions.html"
|
||||
HREF="msdfs.html"
|
||||
ACCESSKEY="P"
|
||||
>Prev</A
|
||||
></TD
|
||||
@ -56,7 +59,7 @@ WIDTH="10%"
|
||||
ALIGN="right"
|
||||
VALIGN="bottom"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
HREF="printingdebug.html"
|
||||
HREF="winbind.html"
|
||||
ACCESSKEY="N"
|
||||
>Next</A
|
||||
></TD
|
||||
@ -71,15 +74,15 @@ CLASS="CHAPTER"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="PRINTING"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>Chapter 6. Printing Support in Samba 2.2.x</H1
|
||||
>Chapter 15. Printing Support</H1
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN763"
|
||||
NAME="AEN1933"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>6.1. Introduction</H1
|
||||
>15.1. Introduction</H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Beginning with the 2.2.0 release, Samba supports
|
||||
the native Windows NT printing mechanisms implemented via
|
||||
@ -136,12 +139,7 @@ TARGET="_top"
|
||||
>There has been some initial confusion about what all this means
|
||||
and whether or not it is a requirement for printer drivers to be
|
||||
installed on a Samba host in order to support printing from Windows
|
||||
clients. A bug existed in Samba 2.2.0 which made Windows NT/2000 clients
|
||||
require that the Samba server possess a valid driver for the printer.
|
||||
This is fixed in Samba 2.2.1 and once again, Windows NT/2000 clients
|
||||
can use the local APW for installing drivers to be used with a Samba
|
||||
served printer. This is the same behavior exhibited by Windows 9x clients.
|
||||
As a side note, Samba does not use these drivers in any way to process
|
||||
clients. As a side note, Samba does not use these drivers in any way to process
|
||||
spooled files. They are utilized entirely by the clients.</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>The following MS KB article, may be of some help if you are dealing with
|
||||
@ -165,9 +163,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN785"
|
||||
NAME="AEN1955"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>6.2. Configuration</H1
|
||||
>15.2. Configuration</H1
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="WARNING"
|
||||
><P
|
||||
@ -222,20 +220,6 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
|
||||
> provided
|
||||
a means of defining the printer driver name to be sent to
|
||||
the client.</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>These parameters, including <TT
|
||||
CLASS="PARAMETER"
|
||||
><I
|
||||
>printer driver
|
||||
file</I
|
||||
></TT
|
||||
> parameter, are being deprecated and should not
|
||||
be used in new installations. For more information on this change,
|
||||
you should refer to the <A
|
||||
HREF="printing.html#MIGRATION"
|
||||
>Migration section</A
|
||||
>
|
||||
of this document.</P
|
||||
></TD
|
||||
></TR
|
||||
></TABLE
|
||||
@ -245,9 +229,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN796"
|
||||
NAME="AEN1963"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>6.2.1. Creating [print$]</H2
|
||||
>15.2.1. Creating [print$]</H2
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>In order to support the uploading of printer driver
|
||||
files, you must first configure a file share named [print$].
|
||||
@ -468,22 +452,14 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN831"
|
||||
NAME="AEN1998"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>6.2.2. Setting Drivers for Existing Printers</H2
|
||||
>15.2.2. Setting Drivers for Existing Printers</H2
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>The initial listing of printers in the Samba host's
|
||||
Printers folder will have no real printer driver assigned
|
||||
to them. By default, in Samba 2.2.0 this driver name was set to
|
||||
<SPAN
|
||||
CLASS="emphasis"
|
||||
><I
|
||||
CLASS="EMPHASIS"
|
||||
>NO PRINTER DRIVER AVAILABLE FOR THIS PRINTER</I
|
||||
></SPAN
|
||||
>.
|
||||
Later versions changed this to a NULL string to allow the use
|
||||
tof the local Add Printer Wizard on NT/2000 clients.
|
||||
to them. This defaults to a NULL string to allow the use
|
||||
of the local Add Printer Wizard on NT/2000 clients.
|
||||
Attempting to view the printer properties for a printer
|
||||
which has this default driver assigned will result in
|
||||
the error message:</P
|
||||
@ -548,9 +524,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN848"
|
||||
NAME="AEN2014"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>6.2.3. Support a large number of printers</H2
|
||||
>15.2.3. Support a large number of printers</H2
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>One issue that has arisen during the development
|
||||
phase of Samba 2.2 is the need to support driver downloads for
|
||||
@ -614,9 +590,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN859"
|
||||
NAME="AEN2025"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>6.2.4. Adding New Printers via the Windows NT APW</H2
|
||||
>15.2.4. Adding New Printers via the Windows NT APW</H2
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>By default, Samba offers all printer shares defined in <TT
|
||||
CLASS="FILENAME"
|
||||
@ -783,9 +759,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN889"
|
||||
NAME="AEN2055"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>6.2.5. Samba and Printer Ports</H2
|
||||
>15.2.5. Samba and Printer Ports</H2
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Windows NT/2000 print servers associate a port with each printer. These normally
|
||||
take the form of LPT1:, COM1:, FILE:, etc... Samba must also support the
|
||||
@ -820,9 +796,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN897"
|
||||
NAME="AEN2063"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>6.3. The Imprints Toolset</H1
|
||||
>15.3. The Imprints Toolset</H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>The Imprints tool set provides a UNIX equivalent of the
|
||||
Windows NT Add Printer Wizard. For complete information, please
|
||||
@ -838,9 +814,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN901"
|
||||
NAME="AEN2067"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>6.3.1. What is Imprints?</H2
|
||||
>15.3.1. What is Imprints?</H2
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Imprints is a collection of tools for supporting the goals
|
||||
of</P
|
||||
@ -870,9 +846,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN911"
|
||||
NAME="AEN2077"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>6.3.2. Creating Printer Driver Packages</H2
|
||||
>15.3.2. Creating Printer Driver Packages</H2
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>The process of creating printer driver packages is beyond
|
||||
the scope of this document (refer to Imprints.txt also included
|
||||
@ -886,9 +862,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN914"
|
||||
NAME="AEN2080"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>6.3.3. The Imprints server</H2
|
||||
>15.3.3. The Imprints server</H2
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>The Imprints server is really a database server that
|
||||
may be queried via standard HTTP mechanisms. Each printer
|
||||
@ -910,9 +886,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN918"
|
||||
NAME="AEN2084"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>6.3.4. The Installation Client</H2
|
||||
>15.3.4. The Installation Client</H2
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>More information regarding the Imprints installation client
|
||||
is available in the <TT
|
||||
@ -1004,168 +980,388 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN940"
|
||||
NAME="AEN2106"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>6.4. <A
|
||||
NAME="MIGRATION"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>Migration to from Samba 2.0.x to 2.2.x</H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Given that printer driver management has changed (we hope improved) in
|
||||
2.2 over prior releases, migration from an existing setup to 2.2 can
|
||||
follow several paths. Here are the possible scenarios for
|
||||
migration:</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
></P
|
||||
><UL
|
||||
><LI
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>If you do not desire the new Windows NT
|
||||
print driver support, nothing needs to be done.
|
||||
All existing parameters work the same.</P
|
||||
></LI
|
||||
><LI
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>If you want to take advantage of NT printer
|
||||
driver support but do not want to migrate the
|
||||
9x drivers to the new setup, the leave the existing
|
||||
<TT
|
||||
CLASS="FILENAME"
|
||||
>printers.def</TT
|
||||
> file. When smbd attempts
|
||||
to locate a
|
||||
9x driver for the printer in the TDB and fails it
|
||||
will drop down to using the printers.def (and all
|
||||
associated parameters). The <B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>make_printerdef</B
|
||||
>
|
||||
tool will also remain for backwards compatibility but will
|
||||
be removed in the next major release.</P
|
||||
></LI
|
||||
><LI
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>If you install a Windows 9x driver for a printer
|
||||
on your Samba host (in the printing TDB), this information will
|
||||
take precedence and the three old printing parameters
|
||||
will be ignored (including print driver location).</P
|
||||
></LI
|
||||
><LI
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>If you want to migrate an existing <TT
|
||||
CLASS="FILENAME"
|
||||
>printers.def</TT
|
||||
>
|
||||
file into the new setup, the current only solution is to use the Windows
|
||||
NT APW to install the NT drivers and the 9x drivers. This can be scripted
|
||||
using <B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>smbclient</B
|
||||
> and <B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>rpcclient</B
|
||||
>. See the
|
||||
Imprints installation client at <A
|
||||
HREF="http://imprints.sourceforge.net/"
|
||||
TARGET="_top"
|
||||
>http://imprints.sourceforge.net/</A
|
||||
>
|
||||
for an example.
|
||||
</P
|
||||
></LI
|
||||
></UL
|
||||
>15.4. Diagnosis</H1
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="WARNING"
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN2108"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>15.4.1. Introduction</H2
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>This is a short description of how to debug printing problems with
|
||||
Samba. This describes how to debug problems with printing from a SMB
|
||||
client to a Samba server, not the other way around. For the reverse
|
||||
see the examples/printing directory.</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Ok, so you want to print to a Samba server from your PC. The first
|
||||
thing you need to understand is that Samba does not actually do any
|
||||
printing itself, it just acts as a middleman between your PC client
|
||||
and your Unix printing subsystem. Samba receives the file from the PC
|
||||
then passes the file to a external "print command". What print command
|
||||
you use is up to you.</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>The whole things is controlled using options in smb.conf. The most
|
||||
relevant options (which you should look up in the smb.conf man page)
|
||||
are:</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
><PRE
|
||||
CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING"
|
||||
> [global]
|
||||
print command - send a file to a spooler
|
||||
lpq command - get spool queue status
|
||||
lprm command - remove a job
|
||||
[printers]
|
||||
path = /var/spool/lpd/samba</PRE
|
||||
></P
|
||||
><TABLE
|
||||
CLASS="WARNING"
|
||||
WIDTH="100%"
|
||||
BORDER="0"
|
||||
><TR
|
||||
><TD
|
||||
WIDTH="25"
|
||||
ALIGN="CENTER"
|
||||
VALIGN="TOP"
|
||||
><IMG
|
||||
SRC="/docbook-dsssl/warning.gif"
|
||||
HSPACE="5"
|
||||
ALT="Warning"></TD
|
||||
><TH
|
||||
ALIGN="LEFT"
|
||||
VALIGN="CENTER"
|
||||
><B
|
||||
>Achtung!</B
|
||||
></TH
|
||||
></TR
|
||||
><TR
|
||||
><TD
|
||||
> </TD
|
||||
><TD
|
||||
ALIGN="LEFT"
|
||||
VALIGN="TOP"
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>The following <TT
|
||||
CLASS="FILENAME"
|
||||
>smb.conf</TT
|
||||
> parameters are considered to
|
||||
be deprecated and will be removed soon. Do not use them in new
|
||||
installations</P
|
||||
>The following are nice to know about:</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
><PRE
|
||||
CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING"
|
||||
> queuepause command - stop a printer or print queue
|
||||
queueresume command - start a printer or print queue</PRE
|
||||
></P
|
||||
><UL
|
||||
><LI
|
||||
><P
|
||||
><TT
|
||||
CLASS="PARAMETER"
|
||||
><I
|
||||
>printer driver file (G)</I
|
||||
></TT
|
||||
>
|
||||
</P
|
||||
></LI
|
||||
><LI
|
||||
>Example:</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
><TT
|
||||
CLASS="PARAMETER"
|
||||
><I
|
||||
>printer driver (S)</I
|
||||
></TT
|
||||
>
|
||||
</P
|
||||
></LI
|
||||
><LI
|
||||
><PRE
|
||||
CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING"
|
||||
> print command = /usr/bin/lpr -r -P%p %s
|
||||
lpq command = /usr/bin/lpq -P%p %s
|
||||
lprm command = /usr/bin/lprm -P%p %j
|
||||
queuepause command = /usr/sbin/lpc -P%p stop
|
||||
queuepause command = /usr/sbin/lpc -P%p start</PRE
|
||||
></P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
><TT
|
||||
CLASS="PARAMETER"
|
||||
><I
|
||||
>printer driver location (S)</I
|
||||
></TT
|
||||
>
|
||||
</P
|
||||
></LI
|
||||
></UL
|
||||
></TD
|
||||
></TR
|
||||
></TABLE
|
||||
>Samba should set reasonable defaults for these depending on your
|
||||
system type, but it isn't clairvoyant. It is not uncommon that you
|
||||
have to tweak these for local conditions. The commands should
|
||||
always have fully specified pathnames, as the smdb may not have
|
||||
the correct PATH values.</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>When you send a job to Samba to be printed, it will make a temporary
|
||||
copy of it in the directory specified in the [printers] section.
|
||||
and it should be periodically cleaned out. The lpr -r option
|
||||
requests that the temporary copy be removed after printing; If
|
||||
printing fails then you might find leftover files in this directory,
|
||||
and it should be periodically cleaned out. Samba used the lpq
|
||||
command to determine the "job number" assigned to your print job
|
||||
by the spooler.</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>The %>letter< are "macros" that get dynamically replaced with appropriate
|
||||
values when they are used. The %s gets replaced with the name of the spool
|
||||
file that Samba creates and the %p gets replaced with the name of the
|
||||
printer. The %j gets replaced with the "job number" which comes from
|
||||
the lpq output.</P
|
||||
></DIV
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN2124"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>15.4.2. Debugging printer problems</H2
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>The have been two new parameters add in Samba 2.2.2 to for
|
||||
better support of Samba 2.0.x backwards capability (<TT
|
||||
CLASS="PARAMETER"
|
||||
><I
|
||||
>disable
|
||||
spoolss</I
|
||||
></TT
|
||||
>) and for using local printers drivers on Windows
|
||||
NT/2000 clients (<TT
|
||||
CLASS="PARAMETER"
|
||||
><I
|
||||
>use client driver</I
|
||||
></TT
|
||||
>). Both of
|
||||
these options are described in the smb.coinf(5) man page and are
|
||||
disabled by default.</P
|
||||
>One way to debug printing problems is to start by replacing these
|
||||
command with shell scripts that record the arguments and the contents
|
||||
of the print file. A simple example of this kind of things might
|
||||
be:</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
><PRE
|
||||
CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING"
|
||||
> print command = /tmp/saveprint %p %s
|
||||
|
||||
#!/bin/saveprint
|
||||
# we make sure that we are the right user
|
||||
/usr/bin/id -p >/tmp/tmp.print
|
||||
# we run the command and save the error messages
|
||||
# replace the command with the one appropriate for your system
|
||||
/usr/bin/lpr -r -P$1 $2 2>>&/tmp/tmp.print</PRE
|
||||
></P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Then you print a file and try removing it. You may find that the
|
||||
print queue needs to be stopped in order to see the queue status
|
||||
and remove the job:</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
><PRE
|
||||
CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING"
|
||||
> h4: {42} % echo hi >/tmp/hi
|
||||
h4: {43} % smbclient //localhost/lw4
|
||||
added interface ip=10.0.0.4 bcast=10.0.0.255 nmask=255.255.255.0
|
||||
Password:
|
||||
Domain=[ASTART] OS=[Unix] Server=[Samba 2.0.7]
|
||||
smb: \> print /tmp/hi
|
||||
putting file /tmp/hi as hi-17534 (0.0 kb/s) (average 0.0 kb/s)
|
||||
smb: \> queue
|
||||
1049 3 hi-17534
|
||||
smb: \> cancel 1049
|
||||
Error cancelling job 1049 : code 0
|
||||
smb: \> cancel 1049
|
||||
Job 1049 cancelled
|
||||
smb: \> queue
|
||||
smb: \> exit</PRE
|
||||
></P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>The 'code 0' indicates that the job was removed. The comment
|
||||
by the smbclient is a bit misleading on this.
|
||||
You can observe the command output and then and look at the
|
||||
/tmp/tmp.print file to see what the results are. You can quickly
|
||||
find out if the problem is with your printing system. Often people
|
||||
have problems with their /etc/printcap file or permissions on
|
||||
various print queues.</P
|
||||
></DIV
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN2133"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>15.4.3. What printers do I have?</H2
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>You can use the 'testprns' program to check to see if the printer
|
||||
name you are using is recognized by Samba. For example, you can
|
||||
use:</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
><PRE
|
||||
CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING"
|
||||
> testprns printer /etc/printcap</PRE
|
||||
></P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Samba can get its printcap information from a file or from a program.
|
||||
You can try the following to see the format of the extracted
|
||||
information:</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
><PRE
|
||||
CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING"
|
||||
> testprns -a printer /etc/printcap
|
||||
|
||||
testprns -a printer '|/bin/cat printcap'</PRE
|
||||
></P
|
||||
></DIV
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN2141"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>15.4.4. Setting up printcap and print servers</H2
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>You may need to set up some printcaps for your Samba system to use.
|
||||
It is strongly recommended that you use the facilities provided by
|
||||
the print spooler to set up queues and printcap information.</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Samba requires either a printcap or program to deliver printcap
|
||||
information. This printcap information has the format:</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
><PRE
|
||||
CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING"
|
||||
> name|alias1|alias2...:option=value:...</PRE
|
||||
></P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>For almost all printing systems, the printer 'name' must be composed
|
||||
only of alphanumeric or underscore '_' characters. Some systems also
|
||||
allow hyphens ('-') as well. An alias is an alternative name for the
|
||||
printer, and an alias with a space in it is used as a 'comment'
|
||||
about the printer. The printcap format optionally uses a \ at the end of lines
|
||||
to extend the printcap to multiple lines.</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Here are some examples of printcap files:</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
></P
|
||||
><OL
|
||||
TYPE="1"
|
||||
><LI
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>pr just printer name</P
|
||||
></LI
|
||||
><LI
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>pr|alias printer name and alias</P
|
||||
></LI
|
||||
><LI
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>pr|My Printer printer name, alias used as comment</P
|
||||
></LI
|
||||
><LI
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>pr:sh:\ Same as pr:sh:cm= testing
|
||||
:cm= \
|
||||
testing</P
|
||||
></LI
|
||||
><LI
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>pr:sh Same as pr:sh:cm= testing
|
||||
:cm= testing</P
|
||||
></LI
|
||||
></OL
|
||||
></P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Samba reads the printcap information when first started. If you make
|
||||
changes in the printcap information, then you must do the following:</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
></P
|
||||
><OL
|
||||
TYPE="1"
|
||||
><LI
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>make sure that the print spooler is aware of these changes.
|
||||
The LPRng system uses the 'lpc reread' command to do this.</P
|
||||
></LI
|
||||
><LI
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>make sure that the spool queues, etc., exist and have the
|
||||
correct permissions. The LPRng system uses the 'checkpc -f'
|
||||
command to do this.</P
|
||||
></LI
|
||||
><LI
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>You now should send a SIGHUP signal to the smbd server to have
|
||||
it reread the printcap information.</P
|
||||
></LI
|
||||
></OL
|
||||
></DIV
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN2169"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>15.4.5. Job sent, no output</H2
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>This is the most frustrating part of printing. You may have sent the
|
||||
job, verified that the job was forwarded, set up a wrapper around
|
||||
the command to send the file, but there was no output from the printer.</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>First, check to make sure that the job REALLY is getting to the
|
||||
right print queue. If you are using a BSD or LPRng print spooler,
|
||||
you can temporarily stop the printing of jobs. Jobs can still be
|
||||
submitted, but they will not be printed. Use:</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
><PRE
|
||||
CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING"
|
||||
> lpc -Pprinter stop</PRE
|
||||
></P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Now submit a print job and then use 'lpq -Pprinter' to see if the
|
||||
job is in the print queue. If it is not in the print queue then
|
||||
you will have to find out why it is not being accepted for printing.</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Next, you may want to check to see what the format of the job really
|
||||
was. With the assistance of the system administrator you can view
|
||||
the submitted jobs files. You may be surprised to find that these
|
||||
are not in what you would expect to call a printable format.
|
||||
You can use the UNIX 'file' utitily to determine what the job
|
||||
format actually is:</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
><PRE
|
||||
CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING"
|
||||
> cd /var/spool/lpd/printer # spool directory of print jobs
|
||||
ls # find job files
|
||||
file dfA001myhost</PRE
|
||||
></P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>You should make sure that your printer supports this format OR that
|
||||
your system administrator has installed a 'print filter' that will
|
||||
convert the file to a format appropriate for your printer.</P
|
||||
></DIV
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN2180"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>15.4.6. Job sent, strange output</H2
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Once you have the job printing, you can then start worrying about
|
||||
making it print nicely.</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>The most common problem is extra pages of output: banner pages
|
||||
OR blank pages at the end.</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>If you are getting banner pages, check and make sure that the
|
||||
printcap option or printer option is configured for no banners.
|
||||
If you have a printcap, this is the :sh (suppress header or banner
|
||||
page) option. You should have the following in your printer.</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
><PRE
|
||||
CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING"
|
||||
> printer: ... :sh</PRE
|
||||
></P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>If you have this option and are still getting banner pages, there
|
||||
is a strong chance that your printer is generating them for you
|
||||
automatically. You should make sure that banner printing is disabled
|
||||
for the printer. This usually requires using the printer setup software
|
||||
or procedures supplied by the printer manufacturer.</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>If you get an extra page of output, this could be due to problems
|
||||
with your job format, or if you are generating PostScript jobs,
|
||||
incorrect setting on your printer driver on the MicroSoft client.
|
||||
For example, under Win95 there is a option:</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
><PRE
|
||||
CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING"
|
||||
> Printers|Printer Name|(Right Click)Properties|Postscript|Advanced|</PRE
|
||||
></P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>that allows you to choose if a Ctrl-D is appended to all jobs.
|
||||
This is a very bad thing to do, as most spooling systems will
|
||||
automatically add a ^D to the end of the job if it is detected as
|
||||
PostScript. The multiple ^D may cause an additional page of output.</P
|
||||
></DIV
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN2192"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>15.4.7. Raw PostScript printed</H2
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>This is a problem that is usually caused by either the print spooling
|
||||
system putting information at the start of the print job that makes
|
||||
the printer think the job is a text file, or your printer simply
|
||||
does not support PostScript. You may need to enable 'Automatic
|
||||
Format Detection' on your printer.</P
|
||||
></DIV
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN2195"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>15.4.8. Advanced Printing</H2
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Note that you can do some pretty magic things by using your
|
||||
imagination with the "print command" option and some shell scripts.
|
||||
Doing print accounting is easy by passing the %U option to a print
|
||||
command shell script. You could even make the print command detect
|
||||
the type of output and its size and send it to an appropriate
|
||||
printer.</P
|
||||
></DIV
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN2198"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>15.4.9. Real debugging</H2
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>If the above debug tips don't help, then maybe you need to bring in
|
||||
the bug guns, system tracing. See Tracing.txt in this directory.</P
|
||||
></DIV
|
||||
></DIV
|
||||
></DIV
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
@ -1184,7 +1380,7 @@ WIDTH="33%"
|
||||
ALIGN="left"
|
||||
VALIGN="top"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
HREF="unix-permissions.html"
|
||||
HREF="msdfs.html"
|
||||
ACCESSKEY="P"
|
||||
>Prev</A
|
||||
></TD
|
||||
@ -1202,7 +1398,7 @@ WIDTH="33%"
|
||||
ALIGN="right"
|
||||
VALIGN="top"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
HREF="printingdebug.html"
|
||||
HREF="winbind.html"
|
||||
ACCESSKEY="N"
|
||||
>Next</A
|
||||
></TD
|
||||
@ -1212,17 +1408,21 @@ ACCESSKEY="N"
|
||||
WIDTH="33%"
|
||||
ALIGN="left"
|
||||
VALIGN="top"
|
||||
>UNIX Permission Bits and Windows NT Access Control Lists</TD
|
||||
>Hosting a Microsoft Distributed File System tree on Samba</TD
|
||||
><TD
|
||||
WIDTH="34%"
|
||||
ALIGN="center"
|
||||
VALIGN="top"
|
||||
> </TD
|
||||
><A
|
||||
HREF="optional.html"
|
||||
ACCESSKEY="U"
|
||||
>Up</A
|
||||
></TD
|
||||
><TD
|
||||
WIDTH="33%"
|
||||
ALIGN="right"
|
||||
VALIGN="top"
|
||||
>Debugging Printing Problems</TD
|
||||
>Unified Logons between Windows NT and UNIX using Winbind</TD
|
||||
></TR
|
||||
></TABLE
|
||||
></DIV
|
||||
|
@ -1,515 +0,0 @@
|
||||
<!DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01 Transitional//EN">
|
||||
<HTML
|
||||
><HEAD
|
||||
><TITLE
|
||||
>Debugging Printing Problems</TITLE
|
||||
><META
|
||||
NAME="GENERATOR"
|
||||
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.77"><LINK
|
||||
REL="HOME"
|
||||
TITLE="SAMBA Project Documentation"
|
||||
HREF="samba-howto-collection.html"><LINK
|
||||
REL="PREVIOUS"
|
||||
TITLE="Printing Support in Samba 2.2.x"
|
||||
HREF="printing.html"><LINK
|
||||
REL="NEXT"
|
||||
TITLE="Security levels"
|
||||
HREF="securitylevels.html"></HEAD
|
||||
><BODY
|
||||
CLASS="CHAPTER"
|
||||
BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF"
|
||||
TEXT="#000000"
|
||||
LINK="#0000FF"
|
||||
VLINK="#840084"
|
||||
ALINK="#0000FF"
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="NAVHEADER"
|
||||
><TABLE
|
||||
SUMMARY="Header navigation table"
|
||||
WIDTH="100%"
|
||||
BORDER="0"
|
||||
CELLPADDING="0"
|
||||
CELLSPACING="0"
|
||||
><TR
|
||||
><TH
|
||||
COLSPAN="3"
|
||||
ALIGN="center"
|
||||
>SAMBA Project Documentation</TH
|
||||
></TR
|
||||
><TR
|
||||
><TD
|
||||
WIDTH="10%"
|
||||
ALIGN="left"
|
||||
VALIGN="bottom"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
HREF="printing.html"
|
||||
ACCESSKEY="P"
|
||||
>Prev</A
|
||||
></TD
|
||||
><TD
|
||||
WIDTH="80%"
|
||||
ALIGN="center"
|
||||
VALIGN="bottom"
|
||||
></TD
|
||||
><TD
|
||||
WIDTH="10%"
|
||||
ALIGN="right"
|
||||
VALIGN="bottom"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
HREF="securitylevels.html"
|
||||
ACCESSKEY="N"
|
||||
>Next</A
|
||||
></TD
|
||||
></TR
|
||||
></TABLE
|
||||
><HR
|
||||
ALIGN="LEFT"
|
||||
WIDTH="100%"></DIV
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="CHAPTER"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="PRINTINGDEBUG"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>Chapter 7. Debugging Printing Problems</H1
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN986"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>7.1. Introduction</H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>This is a short description of how to debug printing problems with
|
||||
Samba. This describes how to debug problems with printing from a SMB
|
||||
client to a Samba server, not the other way around. For the reverse
|
||||
see the examples/printing directory.</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Ok, so you want to print to a Samba server from your PC. The first
|
||||
thing you need to understand is that Samba does not actually do any
|
||||
printing itself, it just acts as a middleman between your PC client
|
||||
and your Unix printing subsystem. Samba receives the file from the PC
|
||||
then passes the file to a external "print command". What print command
|
||||
you use is up to you.</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>The whole things is controlled using options in smb.conf. The most
|
||||
relevant options (which you should look up in the smb.conf man page)
|
||||
are:</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
><PRE
|
||||
CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING"
|
||||
> [global]
|
||||
print command - send a file to a spooler
|
||||
lpq command - get spool queue status
|
||||
lprm command - remove a job
|
||||
[printers]
|
||||
path = /var/spool/lpd/samba</PRE
|
||||
></P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>The following are nice to know about:</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
><PRE
|
||||
CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING"
|
||||
> queuepause command - stop a printer or print queue
|
||||
queueresume command - start a printer or print queue</PRE
|
||||
></P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Example:</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
><PRE
|
||||
CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING"
|
||||
> print command = /usr/bin/lpr -r -P%p %s
|
||||
lpq command = /usr/bin/lpq -P%p %s
|
||||
lprm command = /usr/bin/lprm -P%p %j
|
||||
queuepause command = /usr/sbin/lpc -P%p stop
|
||||
queuepause command = /usr/sbin/lpc -P%p start</PRE
|
||||
></P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Samba should set reasonable defaults for these depending on your
|
||||
system type, but it isn't clairvoyant. It is not uncommon that you
|
||||
have to tweak these for local conditions. The commands should
|
||||
always have fully specified pathnames, as the smdb may not have
|
||||
the correct PATH values.</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>When you send a job to Samba to be printed, it will make a temporary
|
||||
copy of it in the directory specified in the [printers] section.
|
||||
and it should be periodically cleaned out. The lpr -r option
|
||||
requests that the temporary copy be removed after printing; If
|
||||
printing fails then you might find leftover files in this directory,
|
||||
and it should be periodically cleaned out. Samba used the lpq
|
||||
command to determine the "job number" assigned to your print job
|
||||
by the spooler.</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>The %>letter< are "macros" that get dynamically replaced with appropriate
|
||||
values when they are used. The %s gets replaced with the name of the spool
|
||||
file that Samba creates and the %p gets replaced with the name of the
|
||||
printer. The %j gets replaced with the "job number" which comes from
|
||||
the lpq output.</P
|
||||
></DIV
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN1002"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>7.2. Debugging printer problems</H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>One way to debug printing problems is to start by replacing these
|
||||
command with shell scripts that record the arguments and the contents
|
||||
of the print file. A simple example of this kind of things might
|
||||
be:</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
><PRE
|
||||
CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING"
|
||||
> print command = /tmp/saveprint %p %s
|
||||
|
||||
#!/bin/saveprint
|
||||
# we make sure that we are the right user
|
||||
/usr/bin/id -p >/tmp/tmp.print
|
||||
# we run the command and save the error messages
|
||||
# replace the command with the one appropriate for your system
|
||||
/usr/bin/lpr -r -P$1 $2 2>>&/tmp/tmp.print</PRE
|
||||
></P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Then you print a file and try removing it. You may find that the
|
||||
print queue needs to be stopped in order to see the queue status
|
||||
and remove the job:</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
><PRE
|
||||
CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING"
|
||||
> h4: {42} % echo hi >/tmp/hi
|
||||
h4: {43} % smbclient //localhost/lw4
|
||||
added interface ip=10.0.0.4 bcast=10.0.0.255 nmask=255.255.255.0
|
||||
Password:
|
||||
Domain=[ASTART] OS=[Unix] Server=[Samba 2.0.7]
|
||||
smb: \> print /tmp/hi
|
||||
putting file /tmp/hi as hi-17534 (0.0 kb/s) (average 0.0 kb/s)
|
||||
smb: \> queue
|
||||
1049 3 hi-17534
|
||||
smb: \> cancel 1049
|
||||
Error cancelling job 1049 : code 0
|
||||
smb: \> cancel 1049
|
||||
Job 1049 cancelled
|
||||
smb: \> queue
|
||||
smb: \> exit</PRE
|
||||
></P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>The 'code 0' indicates that the job was removed. The comment
|
||||
by the smbclient is a bit misleading on this.
|
||||
You can observe the command output and then and look at the
|
||||
/tmp/tmp.print file to see what the results are. You can quickly
|
||||
find out if the problem is with your printing system. Often people
|
||||
have problems with their /etc/printcap file or permissions on
|
||||
various print queues.</P
|
||||
></DIV
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN1011"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>7.3. What printers do I have?</H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>You can use the 'testprns' program to check to see if the printer
|
||||
name you are using is recognized by Samba. For example, you can
|
||||
use:</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
><PRE
|
||||
CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING"
|
||||
> testprns printer /etc/printcap</PRE
|
||||
></P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Samba can get its printcap information from a file or from a program.
|
||||
You can try the following to see the format of the extracted
|
||||
information:</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
><PRE
|
||||
CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING"
|
||||
> testprns -a printer /etc/printcap
|
||||
|
||||
testprns -a printer '|/bin/cat printcap'</PRE
|
||||
></P
|
||||
></DIV
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN1019"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>7.4. Setting up printcap and print servers</H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>You may need to set up some printcaps for your Samba system to use.
|
||||
It is strongly recommended that you use the facilities provided by
|
||||
the print spooler to set up queues and printcap information.</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Samba requires either a printcap or program to deliver printcap
|
||||
information. This printcap information has the format:</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
><PRE
|
||||
CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING"
|
||||
> name|alias1|alias2...:option=value:...</PRE
|
||||
></P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>For almost all printing systems, the printer 'name' must be composed
|
||||
only of alphanumeric or underscore '_' characters. Some systems also
|
||||
allow hyphens ('-') as well. An alias is an alternative name for the
|
||||
printer, and an alias with a space in it is used as a 'comment'
|
||||
about the printer. The printcap format optionally uses a \ at the end of lines
|
||||
to extend the printcap to multiple lines.</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Here are some examples of printcap files:</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
></P
|
||||
><OL
|
||||
TYPE="1"
|
||||
><LI
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>pr just printer name</P
|
||||
></LI
|
||||
><LI
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>pr|alias printer name and alias</P
|
||||
></LI
|
||||
><LI
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>pr|My Printer printer name, alias used as comment</P
|
||||
></LI
|
||||
><LI
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>pr:sh:\ Same as pr:sh:cm= testing
|
||||
:cm= \
|
||||
testing</P
|
||||
></LI
|
||||
><LI
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>pr:sh Same as pr:sh:cm= testing
|
||||
:cm= testing</P
|
||||
></LI
|
||||
></OL
|
||||
></P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Samba reads the printcap information when first started. If you make
|
||||
changes in the printcap information, then you must do the following:</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
></P
|
||||
><OL
|
||||
TYPE="1"
|
||||
><LI
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>make sure that the print spooler is aware of these changes.
|
||||
The LPRng system uses the 'lpc reread' command to do this.</P
|
||||
></LI
|
||||
><LI
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>make sure that the spool queues, etc., exist and have the
|
||||
correct permissions. The LPRng system uses the 'checkpc -f'
|
||||
command to do this.</P
|
||||
></LI
|
||||
><LI
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>You now should send a SIGHUP signal to the smbd server to have
|
||||
it reread the printcap information.</P
|
||||
></LI
|
||||
></OL
|
||||
></DIV
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN1047"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>7.5. Job sent, no output</H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>This is the most frustrating part of printing. You may have sent the
|
||||
job, verified that the job was forwarded, set up a wrapper around
|
||||
the command to send the file, but there was no output from the printer.</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>First, check to make sure that the job REALLY is getting to the
|
||||
right print queue. If you are using a BSD or LPRng print spooler,
|
||||
you can temporarily stop the printing of jobs. Jobs can still be
|
||||
submitted, but they will not be printed. Use:</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
><PRE
|
||||
CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING"
|
||||
> lpc -Pprinter stop</PRE
|
||||
></P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Now submit a print job and then use 'lpq -Pprinter' to see if the
|
||||
job is in the print queue. If it is not in the print queue then
|
||||
you will have to find out why it is not being accepted for printing.</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Next, you may want to check to see what the format of the job really
|
||||
was. With the assistance of the system administrator you can view
|
||||
the submitted jobs files. You may be surprised to find that these
|
||||
are not in what you would expect to call a printable format.
|
||||
You can use the UNIX 'file' utitily to determine what the job
|
||||
format actually is:</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
><PRE
|
||||
CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING"
|
||||
> cd /var/spool/lpd/printer # spool directory of print jobs
|
||||
ls # find job files
|
||||
file dfA001myhost</PRE
|
||||
></P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>You should make sure that your printer supports this format OR that
|
||||
your system administrator has installed a 'print filter' that will
|
||||
convert the file to a format appropriate for your printer.</P
|
||||
></DIV
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN1058"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>7.6. Job sent, strange output</H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Once you have the job printing, you can then start worrying about
|
||||
making it print nicely.</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>The most common problem is extra pages of output: banner pages
|
||||
OR blank pages at the end.</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>If you are getting banner pages, check and make sure that the
|
||||
printcap option or printer option is configured for no banners.
|
||||
If you have a printcap, this is the :sh (suppress header or banner
|
||||
page) option. You should have the following in your printer.</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
><PRE
|
||||
CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING"
|
||||
> printer: ... :sh</PRE
|
||||
></P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>If you have this option and are still getting banner pages, there
|
||||
is a strong chance that your printer is generating them for you
|
||||
automatically. You should make sure that banner printing is disabled
|
||||
for the printer. This usually requires using the printer setup software
|
||||
or procedures supplied by the printer manufacturer.</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>If you get an extra page of output, this could be due to problems
|
||||
with your job format, or if you are generating PostScript jobs,
|
||||
incorrect setting on your printer driver on the MicroSoft client.
|
||||
For example, under Win95 there is a option:</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
><PRE
|
||||
CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING"
|
||||
> Printers|Printer Name|(Right Click)Properties|Postscript|Advanced|</PRE
|
||||
></P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>that allows you to choose if a Ctrl-D is appended to all jobs.
|
||||
This is a very bad thing to do, as most spooling systems will
|
||||
automatically add a ^D to the end of the job if it is detected as
|
||||
PostScript. The multiple ^D may cause an additional page of output.</P
|
||||
></DIV
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN1070"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>7.7. Raw PostScript printed</H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>This is a problem that is usually caused by either the print spooling
|
||||
system putting information at the start of the print job that makes
|
||||
the printer think the job is a text file, or your printer simply
|
||||
does not support PostScript. You may need to enable 'Automatic
|
||||
Format Detection' on your printer.</P
|
||||
></DIV
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN1073"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>7.8. Advanced Printing</H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Note that you can do some pretty magic things by using your
|
||||
imagination with the "print command" option and some shell scripts.
|
||||
Doing print accounting is easy by passing the %U option to a print
|
||||
command shell script. You could even make the print command detect
|
||||
the type of output and its size and send it to an appropriate
|
||||
printer.</P
|
||||
></DIV
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN1076"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>7.9. Real debugging</H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>If the above debug tips don't help, then maybe you need to bring in
|
||||
the bug guns, system tracing. See Tracing.txt in this directory.</P
|
||||
></DIV
|
||||
></DIV
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="NAVFOOTER"
|
||||
><HR
|
||||
ALIGN="LEFT"
|
||||
WIDTH="100%"><TABLE
|
||||
SUMMARY="Footer navigation table"
|
||||
WIDTH="100%"
|
||||
BORDER="0"
|
||||
CELLPADDING="0"
|
||||
CELLSPACING="0"
|
||||
><TR
|
||||
><TD
|
||||
WIDTH="33%"
|
||||
ALIGN="left"
|
||||
VALIGN="top"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
HREF="printing.html"
|
||||
ACCESSKEY="P"
|
||||
>Prev</A
|
||||
></TD
|
||||
><TD
|
||||
WIDTH="34%"
|
||||
ALIGN="center"
|
||||
VALIGN="top"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
HREF="samba-howto-collection.html"
|
||||
ACCESSKEY="H"
|
||||
>Home</A
|
||||
></TD
|
||||
><TD
|
||||
WIDTH="33%"
|
||||
ALIGN="right"
|
||||
VALIGN="top"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
HREF="securitylevels.html"
|
||||
ACCESSKEY="N"
|
||||
>Next</A
|
||||
></TD
|
||||
></TR
|
||||
><TR
|
||||
><TD
|
||||
WIDTH="33%"
|
||||
ALIGN="left"
|
||||
VALIGN="top"
|
||||
>Printing Support in Samba 2.2.x</TD
|
||||
><TD
|
||||
WIDTH="34%"
|
||||
ALIGN="center"
|
||||
VALIGN="top"
|
||||
> </TD
|
||||
><TD
|
||||
WIDTH="33%"
|
||||
ALIGN="right"
|
||||
VALIGN="top"
|
||||
>Security levels</TD
|
||||
></TR
|
||||
></TABLE
|
||||
></DIV
|
||||
></BODY
|
||||
></HTML
|
||||
>
|
@ -1,12 +1,11 @@
|
||||
<!DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01//EN">
|
||||
<!DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01 Transitional//EN">
|
||||
<HTML
|
||||
><HEAD
|
||||
><TITLE
|
||||
>rpcclient</TITLE
|
||||
><META
|
||||
NAME="GENERATOR"
|
||||
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.76b+
|
||||
"></HEAD
|
||||
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.77"></HEAD
|
||||
><BODY
|
||||
CLASS="REFENTRY"
|
||||
BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF"
|
||||
@ -16,7 +15,9 @@ VLINK="#840084"
|
||||
ALINK="#0000FF"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="RPCCLIENT">rpcclient</H1
|
||||
NAME="RPCCLIENT"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>rpcclient</H1
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="REFNAMEDIV"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
@ -29,13 +30,15 @@ NAME="AEN5"
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="REFSYNOPSISDIV"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN8"><H2
|
||||
NAME="AEN8"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
>Synopsis</H2
|
||||
><P
|
||||
><B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>rpcclient</B
|
||||
> [-A authfile] [-c <command string>] [-d debuglevel] [-h] [-l logfile] [-N] [-s <smb config file>] [-U username[%password]] [-W workgroup] [-N] [-I destinationIP] {server}</P
|
||||
> [-A authfile] [-c <command string>] [-d debuglevel] [-h] [-l logfile] [-N] [-s <smb config file>] [-U username[%password]] [-W workgroup] [-N] [-I destinationIP] {server}</P
|
||||
></DIV
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="REFSECT1"
|
||||
@ -102,21 +105,12 @@ CLASS="FILENAME"
|
||||
password used in the connection. The format of the file is
|
||||
</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
><TABLE
|
||||
BORDER="0"
|
||||
BGCOLOR="#E0E0E0"
|
||||
WIDTH="90%"
|
||||
><TR
|
||||
><TD
|
||||
><PRE
|
||||
CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING"
|
||||
> username = <value>
|
||||
password = <value>
|
||||
domain = <value>
|
||||
> username = <value>
|
||||
password = <value>
|
||||
domain = <value>
|
||||
</PRE
|
||||
></TD
|
||||
></TR
|
||||
></TABLE
|
||||
></P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Make certain that the permissions on the file restrict
|
||||
@ -130,6 +124,53 @@ CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING"
|
||||
below)) </P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>-d|--debug=debuglevel</DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
><TT
|
||||
CLASS="REPLACEABLE"
|
||||
><I
|
||||
>debuglevel</I
|
||||
></TT
|
||||
> is an integer
|
||||
from 0 to 10. The default value if this parameter is
|
||||
not specified is zero.</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>The higher this value, the more detail will be
|
||||
logged to the log files about the activities of the
|
||||
server. At level 0, only critical errors and serious
|
||||
warnings will be logged. Level 1 is a reasonable level for
|
||||
day to day running - it generates a small amount of
|
||||
information about operations carried out.</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Levels above 1 will generate considerable
|
||||
amounts of log data, and should only be used when
|
||||
investigating a problem. Levels above 3 are designed for
|
||||
use only by developers and generate HUGE amounts of log
|
||||
data, most of which is extremely cryptic.</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Note that specifying this parameter here will
|
||||
override the <A
|
||||
HREF="smb.conf.5.html#loglevel"
|
||||
TARGET="_top"
|
||||
>log
|
||||
level</A
|
||||
> parameter in the <A
|
||||
HREF="smb.conf.5.html"
|
||||
TARGET="_top"
|
||||
><TT
|
||||
CLASS="FILENAME"
|
||||
>smb.conf(5)</TT
|
||||
></A
|
||||
> file.</P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>-h|--help</DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Print a summary of command line options.</P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>-I IP-address</DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
@ -262,14 +303,17 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="REFSECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN92"
|
||||
NAME="AEN107"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
>COMMANDS</H2
|
||||
><P
|
||||
><SPAN
|
||||
CLASS="emphasis"
|
||||
><I
|
||||
CLASS="EMPHASIS"
|
||||
>LSARPC</I
|
||||
></SPAN
|
||||
></P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
></P
|
||||
@ -310,9 +354,12 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
><P
|
||||
> </P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
><SPAN
|
||||
CLASS="emphasis"
|
||||
><I
|
||||
CLASS="EMPHASIS"
|
||||
>SAMR</I
|
||||
></SPAN
|
||||
></P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
></P
|
||||
@ -377,9 +424,12 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
><P
|
||||
> </P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
><SPAN
|
||||
CLASS="emphasis"
|
||||
><I
|
||||
CLASS="EMPHASIS"
|
||||
>SPOOLSS</I
|
||||
></SPAN
|
||||
></P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
></P
|
||||
@ -388,7 +438,7 @@ CLASS="EMPHASIS"
|
||||
><P
|
||||
><B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>adddriver <arch> <config></B
|
||||
>adddriver <arch> <config></B
|
||||
>
|
||||
- Execute an AddPrinterDriver() RPC to install the printer driver
|
||||
information on the server. Note that the driver files should
|
||||
@ -415,12 +465,6 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
|
||||
> parameter is defined as
|
||||
follows: </P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
><TABLE
|
||||
BORDER="0"
|
||||
BGCOLOR="#E0E0E0"
|
||||
WIDTH="90%"
|
||||
><TR
|
||||
><TD
|
||||
><PRE
|
||||
CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING"
|
||||
> Long Printer Name:\
|
||||
@ -432,9 +476,6 @@ CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING"
|
||||
Default Data Type:\
|
||||
Comma Separated list of Files
|
||||
</PRE
|
||||
></TD
|
||||
></TR
|
||||
></TABLE
|
||||
></P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Any empty fields should be enter as the string "NULL". </P
|
||||
@ -450,8 +491,8 @@ CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING"
|
||||
><P
|
||||
><B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>addprinter <printername>
|
||||
<sharename> <drivername> <port></B
|
||||
>addprinter <printername>
|
||||
<sharename> <drivername> <port></B
|
||||
>
|
||||
- Add a printer on the remote server. This printer
|
||||
will be automatically shared. Be aware that the printer driver
|
||||
@ -497,7 +538,7 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
><P
|
||||
><B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>enumjobs <printer></B
|
||||
>enumjobs <printer></B
|
||||
>
|
||||
- List the jobs and status of a given printer.
|
||||
This command corresponds to the MS Platform SDK EnumJobs()
|
||||
@ -539,7 +580,7 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
><P
|
||||
><B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>getdata <printername></B
|
||||
>getdata <printername></B
|
||||
>
|
||||
- Retrieve the data for a given printer setting. See
|
||||
the <B
|
||||
@ -553,7 +594,7 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
><P
|
||||
><B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>getdriver <printername></B
|
||||
>getdriver <printername></B
|
||||
>
|
||||
- Retrieve the printer driver information (such as driver file,
|
||||
config file, dependent files, etc...) for
|
||||
@ -565,7 +606,7 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
><P
|
||||
><B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>getdriverdir <arch></B
|
||||
>getdriverdir <arch></B
|
||||
>
|
||||
- Execute a GetPrinterDriverDirectory()
|
||||
RPC to retrieve the SMB share name and subdirectory for
|
||||
@ -583,7 +624,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
|
||||
><P
|
||||
><B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>getprinter <printername></B
|
||||
>getprinter <printername></B
|
||||
>
|
||||
- Retrieve the current printer information. This command
|
||||
corresponds to the GetPrinter() MS Platform SDK function.
|
||||
@ -593,7 +634,7 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
><P
|
||||
><B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>openprinter <printername></B
|
||||
>openprinter <printername></B
|
||||
>
|
||||
- Execute an OpenPrinterEx() and ClosePrinter() RPC
|
||||
against a given printer. </P
|
||||
@ -602,8 +643,8 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
><P
|
||||
><B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>setdriver <printername>
|
||||
<drivername></B
|
||||
>setdriver <printername>
|
||||
<drivername></B
|
||||
>
|
||||
- Execute a SetPrinter() command to update the printer driver
|
||||
associated with an installed printer. The printer driver must
|
||||
@ -621,9 +662,12 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
></LI
|
||||
></UL
|
||||
><P
|
||||
><SPAN
|
||||
CLASS="emphasis"
|
||||
><I
|
||||
CLASS="EMPHASIS"
|
||||
>GENERAL OPTIONS</I
|
||||
></SPAN
|
||||
></P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
></P
|
||||
@ -661,7 +705,7 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="REFSECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN212"
|
||||
NAME="AEN227"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
>BUGS</H2
|
||||
@ -676,9 +720,12 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>From Luke Leighton's original rpcclient man page:</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
><SPAN
|
||||
CLASS="emphasis"
|
||||
><I
|
||||
CLASS="EMPHASIS"
|
||||
>"WARNING!</I
|
||||
></SPAN
|
||||
> The MSRPC over SMB code has
|
||||
been developed from examining Network traces. No documentation is
|
||||
available from the original creators (Microsoft) on how MSRPC over
|
||||
@ -703,7 +750,7 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="REFSECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN222"
|
||||
NAME="AEN237"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
>VERSION</H2
|
||||
@ -714,7 +761,7 @@ NAME="AEN222"
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="REFSECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN225"
|
||||
NAME="AEN240"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
>AUTHOR</H2
|
||||
|
@ -9,12 +9,15 @@ CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.77"><LINK
|
||||
REL="HOME"
|
||||
TITLE="SAMBA Project Documentation"
|
||||
HREF="samba-howto-collection.html"><LINK
|
||||
REL="UP"
|
||||
TITLE="Type of installation"
|
||||
HREF="type.html"><LINK
|
||||
REL="PREVIOUS"
|
||||
TITLE="How to Configure Samba 2.2 as a Primary Domain Controller"
|
||||
TITLE="How to Configure Samba as a NT4 Primary Domain Controller"
|
||||
HREF="samba-pdc.html"><LINK
|
||||
REL="NEXT"
|
||||
TITLE="Storing Samba's User/Machine Account information in an LDAP Directory"
|
||||
HREF="samba-ldap-howto.html"></HEAD
|
||||
TITLE="Samba as a ADS domain member"
|
||||
HREF="ads.html"></HEAD
|
||||
><BODY
|
||||
CLASS="CHAPTER"
|
||||
BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF"
|
||||
@ -56,7 +59,7 @@ WIDTH="10%"
|
||||
ALIGN="right"
|
||||
VALIGN="bottom"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
HREF="samba-ldap-howto.html"
|
||||
HREF="ads.html"
|
||||
ACCESSKEY="N"
|
||||
>Next</A
|
||||
></TD
|
||||
@ -71,15 +74,15 @@ CLASS="CHAPTER"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="SAMBA-BDC"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>Chapter 12. How to Act as a Backup Domain Controller in a Purely Samba Controlled Domain</H1
|
||||
>Chapter 8. How to Act as a Backup Domain Controller in a Purely Samba Controlled Domain</H1
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN2148"
|
||||
NAME="AEN1143"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>12.1. Prerequisite Reading</H1
|
||||
>8.1. Prerequisite Reading</H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Before you continue reading in this chapter, please make sure
|
||||
that you are comfortable with configuring a Samba PDC
|
||||
@ -94,9 +97,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN2152"
|
||||
NAME="AEN1147"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>12.2. Background</H1
|
||||
>8.2. Background</H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>What is a Domain Controller? It is a machine that is able to answer
|
||||
logon requests from workstations in a Windows NT Domain. Whenever a
|
||||
@ -139,9 +142,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN2160"
|
||||
NAME="AEN1155"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>12.3. What qualifies a Domain Controller on the network?</H1
|
||||
>8.3. What qualifies a Domain Controller on the network?</H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Every machine that is a Domain Controller for the domain SAMBA has to
|
||||
register the NetBIOS group name SAMBA#1c with the WINS server and/or
|
||||
@ -156,9 +159,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN2163"
|
||||
NAME="AEN1158"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>12.3.1. How does a Workstation find its domain controller?</H2
|
||||
>8.3.1. How does a Workstation find its domain controller?</H2
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>A NT workstation in the domain SAMBA that wants a local user to be
|
||||
authenticated has to find the domain controller for SAMBA. It does
|
||||
@ -175,9 +178,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN2166"
|
||||
NAME="AEN1161"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>12.3.2. When is the PDC needed?</H2
|
||||
>8.3.2. When is the PDC needed?</H2
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Whenever a user wants to change his password, this has to be done on
|
||||
the PDC. To find the PDC, the workstation does a NetBIOS name query
|
||||
@ -191,9 +194,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN2169"
|
||||
NAME="AEN1164"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>12.4. Can Samba be a Backup Domain Controller?</H1
|
||||
>8.4. Can Samba be a Backup Domain Controller?</H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>With version 2.2, no. The native NT SAM replication protocols have
|
||||
not yet been fully implemented. The Samba Team is working on
|
||||
@ -210,9 +213,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN2173"
|
||||
NAME="AEN1168"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>12.5. How do I set up a Samba BDC?</H1
|
||||
>8.5. How do I set up a Samba BDC?</H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Several things have to be done:</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
@ -277,9 +280,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN2190"
|
||||
NAME="AEN1185"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>12.5.1. How do I replicate the smbpasswd file?</H2
|
||||
>8.5.1. How do I replicate the smbpasswd file?</H2
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Replication of the smbpasswd file is sensitive. It has to be done
|
||||
whenever changes to the SAM are made. Every user's password change is
|
||||
@ -329,7 +332,7 @@ WIDTH="33%"
|
||||
ALIGN="right"
|
||||
VALIGN="top"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
HREF="samba-ldap-howto.html"
|
||||
HREF="ads.html"
|
||||
ACCESSKEY="N"
|
||||
>Next</A
|
||||
></TD
|
||||
@ -339,17 +342,21 @@ ACCESSKEY="N"
|
||||
WIDTH="33%"
|
||||
ALIGN="left"
|
||||
VALIGN="top"
|
||||
>How to Configure Samba 2.2 as a Primary Domain Controller</TD
|
||||
>How to Configure Samba as a NT4 Primary Domain Controller</TD
|
||||
><TD
|
||||
WIDTH="34%"
|
||||
ALIGN="center"
|
||||
VALIGN="top"
|
||||
> </TD
|
||||
><A
|
||||
HREF="type.html"
|
||||
ACCESSKEY="U"
|
||||
>Up</A
|
||||
></TD
|
||||
><TD
|
||||
WIDTH="33%"
|
||||
ALIGN="right"
|
||||
VALIGN="top"
|
||||
>Storing Samba's User/Machine Account information in an LDAP Directory</TD
|
||||
>Samba as a ADS domain member</TD
|
||||
></TR
|
||||
></TABLE
|
||||
></DIV
|
||||
|
@ -48,7 +48,7 @@ CLASS="emphasis"
|
||||
CLASS="EMPHASIS"
|
||||
>Last Update</I
|
||||
></SPAN
|
||||
> : $Date: 2002/11/13 15:34:49 $</P
|
||||
> : $Date: 2003/01/15 22:29:23 $</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>This book is a collection of HOWTOs added to Samba documentation over the years.
|
||||
I try to ensure that all are current, but sometimes the is a larger job
|
||||
|
@ -9,12 +9,15 @@ CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.77"><LINK
|
||||
REL="HOME"
|
||||
TITLE="SAMBA Project Documentation"
|
||||
HREF="samba-howto-collection.html"><LINK
|
||||
REL="UP"
|
||||
TITLE="Optional configuration"
|
||||
HREF="optional.html"><LINK
|
||||
REL="PREVIOUS"
|
||||
TITLE="How to Act as a Backup Domain Controller in a Purely Samba Controlled Domain"
|
||||
HREF="samba-bdc.html"><LINK
|
||||
TITLE="Stackable VFS modules"
|
||||
HREF="vfs.html"><LINK
|
||||
REL="NEXT"
|
||||
TITLE="Using samba 3.0 with ActiveDirectory support"
|
||||
HREF="ads.html"></HEAD
|
||||
TITLE="HOWTO Access Samba source code via CVS"
|
||||
HREF="cvs-access.html"></HEAD
|
||||
><BODY
|
||||
CLASS="CHAPTER"
|
||||
BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF"
|
||||
@ -42,7 +45,7 @@ WIDTH="10%"
|
||||
ALIGN="left"
|
||||
VALIGN="bottom"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
HREF="samba-bdc.html"
|
||||
HREF="vfs.html"
|
||||
ACCESSKEY="P"
|
||||
>Prev</A
|
||||
></TD
|
||||
@ -56,7 +59,7 @@ WIDTH="10%"
|
||||
ALIGN="right"
|
||||
VALIGN="bottom"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
HREF="ads.html"
|
||||
HREF="cvs-access.html"
|
||||
ACCESSKEY="N"
|
||||
>Next</A
|
||||
></TD
|
||||
@ -71,15 +74,15 @@ CLASS="CHAPTER"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="SAMBA-LDAP-HOWTO"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>Chapter 13. Storing Samba's User/Machine Account information in an LDAP Directory</H1
|
||||
>Chapter 20. Storing Samba's User/Machine Account information in an LDAP Directory</H1
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN2211"
|
||||
NAME="AEN2747"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>13.1. Purpose</H1
|
||||
>20.1. Purpose</H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>This document describes how to use an LDAP directory for storing Samba user
|
||||
account information traditionally stored in the smbpasswd(5) file. It is
|
||||
@ -145,9 +148,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN2231"
|
||||
NAME="AEN2767"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>13.2. Introduction</H1
|
||||
>20.2. Introduction</H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Traditionally, when configuring <A
|
||||
HREF="smb.conf.5.html#ENCRYPTPASSWORDS"
|
||||
@ -262,9 +265,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN2260"
|
||||
NAME="AEN2796"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>13.3. Supported LDAP Servers</H1
|
||||
>20.3. Supported LDAP Servers</H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>The LDAP samdb code in 2.2.3 has been developed and tested using the OpenLDAP
|
||||
2.0 server and client libraries. The same code should be able to work with
|
||||
@ -287,9 +290,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN2265"
|
||||
NAME="AEN2801"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>13.4. Schema and Relationship to the RFC 2307 posixAccount</H1
|
||||
>20.4. Schema and Relationship to the RFC 2307 posixAccount</H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Samba 2.2.3 includes the necessary schema file for OpenLDAP 2.0 in
|
||||
<TT
|
||||
@ -346,17 +349,17 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN2277"
|
||||
NAME="AEN2813"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>13.5. Configuring Samba with LDAP</H1
|
||||
>20.5. Configuring Samba with LDAP</H1
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN2279"
|
||||
NAME="AEN2815"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>13.5.1. OpenLDAP configuration</H2
|
||||
>20.5.1. OpenLDAP configuration</H2
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>To include support for the sambaAccount object in an OpenLDAP directory
|
||||
server, first copy the samba.schema file to slapd's configuration directory.</P
|
||||
@ -436,9 +439,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN2296"
|
||||
NAME="AEN2832"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>13.5.2. Configuring Samba</H2
|
||||
>20.5.2. Configuring Samba</H2
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>The following parameters are available in smb.conf only with <TT
|
||||
CLASS="PARAMETER"
|
||||
@ -556,9 +559,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN2324"
|
||||
NAME="AEN2860"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>13.6. Accounts and Groups management</H1
|
||||
>20.6. Accounts and Groups management</H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>As users accounts are managed thru the sambaAccount objectclass, you should
|
||||
modify you existing administration tools to deal with sambaAccount attributes.</P
|
||||
@ -581,9 +584,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN2329"
|
||||
NAME="AEN2865"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>13.7. Security and sambaAccount</H1
|
||||
>20.7. Security and sambaAccount</H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>There are two important points to remember when discussing the security
|
||||
of sambaAccount entries in the directory.</P
|
||||
@ -660,9 +663,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN2349"
|
||||
NAME="AEN2885"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>13.8. LDAP specials attributes for sambaAccounts</H1
|
||||
>20.8. LDAP specials attributes for sambaAccounts</H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>The sambaAccount objectclass is composed of the following attributes:</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
@ -871,9 +874,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN2419"
|
||||
NAME="AEN2955"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>13.9. Example LDIF Entries for a sambaAccount</H1
|
||||
>20.9. Example LDIF Entries for a sambaAccount</H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>The following is a working LDIF with the inclusion of the posixAccount objectclass:</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
@ -929,9 +932,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN2427"
|
||||
NAME="AEN2963"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>13.10. Comments</H1
|
||||
>20.10. Comments</H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Please mail all comments regarding this HOWTO to <A
|
||||
HREF="mailto:jerry@samba.org"
|
||||
@ -957,7 +960,7 @@ WIDTH="33%"
|
||||
ALIGN="left"
|
||||
VALIGN="top"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
HREF="samba-bdc.html"
|
||||
HREF="vfs.html"
|
||||
ACCESSKEY="P"
|
||||
>Prev</A
|
||||
></TD
|
||||
@ -975,7 +978,7 @@ WIDTH="33%"
|
||||
ALIGN="right"
|
||||
VALIGN="top"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
HREF="ads.html"
|
||||
HREF="cvs-access.html"
|
||||
ACCESSKEY="N"
|
||||
>Next</A
|
||||
></TD
|
||||
@ -985,17 +988,21 @@ ACCESSKEY="N"
|
||||
WIDTH="33%"
|
||||
ALIGN="left"
|
||||
VALIGN="top"
|
||||
>How to Act as a Backup Domain Controller in a Purely Samba Controlled Domain</TD
|
||||
>Stackable VFS modules</TD
|
||||
><TD
|
||||
WIDTH="34%"
|
||||
ALIGN="center"
|
||||
VALIGN="top"
|
||||
> </TD
|
||||
><A
|
||||
HREF="optional.html"
|
||||
ACCESSKEY="U"
|
||||
>Up</A
|
||||
></TD
|
||||
><TD
|
||||
WIDTH="33%"
|
||||
ALIGN="right"
|
||||
VALIGN="top"
|
||||
>Using samba 3.0 with ActiveDirectory support</TD
|
||||
>HOWTO Access Samba source code via CVS</TD
|
||||
></TR
|
||||
></TABLE
|
||||
></DIV
|
||||
|
@ -2,19 +2,22 @@
|
||||
<HTML
|
||||
><HEAD
|
||||
><TITLE
|
||||
>Security levels</TITLE
|
||||
>User and Share security level (for servers not in a domain)</TITLE
|
||||
><META
|
||||
NAME="GENERATOR"
|
||||
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.77"><LINK
|
||||
REL="HOME"
|
||||
TITLE="SAMBA Project Documentation"
|
||||
HREF="samba-howto-collection.html"><LINK
|
||||
REL="UP"
|
||||
TITLE="Type of installation"
|
||||
HREF="type.html"><LINK
|
||||
REL="PREVIOUS"
|
||||
TITLE="Debugging Printing Problems"
|
||||
HREF="printingdebug.html"><LINK
|
||||
TITLE="Type of installation"
|
||||
HREF="type.html"><LINK
|
||||
REL="NEXT"
|
||||
TITLE="security = domain in Samba 2.x"
|
||||
HREF="domain-security.html"></HEAD
|
||||
TITLE="How to Configure Samba as a NT4 Primary Domain Controller"
|
||||
HREF="samba-pdc.html"></HEAD
|
||||
><BODY
|
||||
CLASS="CHAPTER"
|
||||
BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF"
|
||||
@ -42,7 +45,7 @@ WIDTH="10%"
|
||||
ALIGN="left"
|
||||
VALIGN="bottom"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
HREF="printingdebug.html"
|
||||
HREF="type.html"
|
||||
ACCESSKEY="P"
|
||||
>Prev</A
|
||||
></TD
|
||||
@ -56,7 +59,7 @@ WIDTH="10%"
|
||||
ALIGN="right"
|
||||
VALIGN="bottom"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
HREF="domain-security.html"
|
||||
HREF="samba-pdc.html"
|
||||
ACCESSKEY="N"
|
||||
>Next</A
|
||||
></TD
|
||||
@ -71,61 +74,7 @@ CLASS="CHAPTER"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="SECURITYLEVELS"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>Chapter 8. Security levels</H1
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN1089"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>8.1. Introduction</H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Samba supports the following options to the global smb.conf parameter</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
><PRE
|
||||
CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING"
|
||||
>[global]
|
||||
<A
|
||||
HREF="smb.conf.5.html#SECURITY"
|
||||
TARGET="_top"
|
||||
><TT
|
||||
CLASS="PARAMETER"
|
||||
><I
|
||||
>security</I
|
||||
></TT
|
||||
></A
|
||||
> = [share|user(default)|domain|ads]</PRE
|
||||
></P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Please refer to the smb.conf man page for usage information and to the document
|
||||
<A
|
||||
HREF="DOMAIN_MEMBER.html"
|
||||
TARGET="_top"
|
||||
>DOMAIN_MEMBER.html</A
|
||||
> for further background details
|
||||
on domain mode security. The Windows 2000 Kerberos domain security model
|
||||
(security = ads) is described in the <A
|
||||
HREF="ADS-HOWTO.html"
|
||||
TARGET="_top"
|
||||
>ADS-HOWTO.html</A
|
||||
>.</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Of the above, "security = server" means that Samba reports to clients that
|
||||
it is running in "user mode" but actually passes off all authentication
|
||||
requests to another "user mode" server. This requires an additional
|
||||
parameter "password server =" that points to the real authentication server.
|
||||
That real authentication server can be another Samba server or can be a
|
||||
Windows NT server, the later natively capable of encrypted password support.</P
|
||||
></DIV
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN1100"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>8.2. More complete description of security levels</H1
|
||||
>Chapter 6. User and Share security level (for servers not in a domain)</H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>A SMB server tells the client at startup what "security level" it is
|
||||
running. There are two options "share level" and "user level". Which
|
||||
@ -211,7 +160,13 @@ smbpasswd file with SMB style encrypted passwords. It is
|
||||
cryptographically impossible to translate from unix style encryption
|
||||
to SMB style encryption, although there are some fairly simple management
|
||||
schemes by which the two could be kept in sync.</P
|
||||
></DIV
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>"security = server" means that Samba reports to clients that
|
||||
it is running in "user mode" but actually passes off all authentication
|
||||
requests to another "user mode" server. This requires an additional
|
||||
parameter "password server =" that points to the real authentication server.
|
||||
That real authentication server can be another Samba server or can be a
|
||||
Windows NT server, the later natively capable of encrypted password support.</P
|
||||
></DIV
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="NAVFOOTER"
|
||||
@ -229,7 +184,7 @@ WIDTH="33%"
|
||||
ALIGN="left"
|
||||
VALIGN="top"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
HREF="printingdebug.html"
|
||||
HREF="type.html"
|
||||
ACCESSKEY="P"
|
||||
>Prev</A
|
||||
></TD
|
||||
@ -247,7 +202,7 @@ WIDTH="33%"
|
||||
ALIGN="right"
|
||||
VALIGN="top"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
HREF="domain-security.html"
|
||||
HREF="samba-pdc.html"
|
||||
ACCESSKEY="N"
|
||||
>Next</A
|
||||
></TD
|
||||
@ -257,17 +212,21 @@ ACCESSKEY="N"
|
||||
WIDTH="33%"
|
||||
ALIGN="left"
|
||||
VALIGN="top"
|
||||
>Debugging Printing Problems</TD
|
||||
>Type of installation</TD
|
||||
><TD
|
||||
WIDTH="34%"
|
||||
ALIGN="center"
|
||||
VALIGN="top"
|
||||
> </TD
|
||||
><A
|
||||
HREF="type.html"
|
||||
ACCESSKEY="U"
|
||||
>Up</A
|
||||
></TD
|
||||
><TD
|
||||
WIDTH="33%"
|
||||
ALIGN="right"
|
||||
VALIGN="top"
|
||||
>security = domain in Samba 2.x</TD
|
||||
>How to Configure Samba as a NT4 Primary Domain Controller</TD
|
||||
></TR
|
||||
></TABLE
|
||||
></DIV
|
||||
|
@ -13057,7 +13057,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
|
||||
>
|
||||
list will be allowed. By default this option is disabled so that a
|
||||
client can supply a username to be used by the server. Enabling
|
||||
this parameter will force the server to only use the login
|
||||
this parameter will force the server to only user the login
|
||||
names from the <TT
|
||||
CLASS="PARAMETER"
|
||||
><I
|
||||
@ -13066,7 +13066,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
|
||||
> list and is only really
|
||||
useful in <A
|
||||
HREF="#SECURITYEQUALSSHARE"
|
||||
>share level</A
|
||||
>shave level</A
|
||||
>
|
||||
security.</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
|
@ -1,12 +1,11 @@
|
||||
<!DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01//EN">
|
||||
<!DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01 Transitional//EN">
|
||||
<HTML
|
||||
><HEAD
|
||||
><TITLE
|
||||
>smbclient</TITLE
|
||||
><META
|
||||
NAME="GENERATOR"
|
||||
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.76b+
|
||||
"></HEAD
|
||||
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.77"></HEAD
|
||||
><BODY
|
||||
CLASS="REFENTRY"
|
||||
BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF"
|
||||
@ -16,7 +15,9 @@ VLINK="#840084"
|
||||
ALINK="#0000FF"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="SMBCLIENT">smbclient</H1
|
||||
NAME="SMBCLIENT"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>smbclient</H1
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="REFNAMEDIV"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
@ -29,13 +30,15 @@ NAME="AEN5"
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="REFSYNOPSISDIV"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN8"><H2
|
||||
NAME="AEN8"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
>Synopsis</H2
|
||||
><P
|
||||
><B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>smbclient</B
|
||||
> {servicename} [password] [-b <buffer size>] [-d debuglevel] [-D Directory] [-U username] [-W workgroup] [-M <netbios name>] [-m maxprotocol] [-A authfile] [-N] [-l logfile] [-L <netbios name>] [-I destinationIP] [-E] [-c <command string>] [-i scope] [-O <socket options>] [-p port] [-R <name resolve order>] [-s <smb config file>] [-T<c|x>IXFqgbNan]</P
|
||||
> {servicename} [password] [-b <buffer size>] [-d debuglevel] [-D Directory] [-U username] [-W workgroup] [-M <netbios name>] [-m maxprotocol] [-A authfile] [-N] [-l logfile] [-L <netbios name>] [-I destinationIP] [-E] [-c <command string>] [-i scope] [-O <socket options>] [-p port] [-R <name resolve order>] [-s <smb config file>] [-T<c|x>IXFqgbNan]</P
|
||||
></DIV
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="REFSECT1"
|
||||
@ -193,7 +196,7 @@ CLASS="FILENAME"
|
||||
options. </P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>-R <name resolve order></DT
|
||||
>-R <name resolve order></DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>This option is used by the programs in the Samba
|
||||
@ -346,9 +349,12 @@ CLASS="FILENAME"
|
||||
> for a description of how to handle incoming
|
||||
WinPopup messages in Samba. </P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
><SPAN
|
||||
CLASS="emphasis"
|
||||
><I
|
||||
CLASS="EMPHASIS"
|
||||
>Note</I
|
||||
></SPAN
|
||||
>: Copy WinPopup into the startup group
|
||||
on your WfWg PCs if you want them to always be able to receive
|
||||
messages. </P
|
||||
@ -367,9 +373,12 @@ CLASS="FILENAME"
|
||||
CLASS="FILENAME"
|
||||
>rfc1002.txt</TT
|
||||
>.
|
||||
NetBIOS scopes are <I
|
||||
NetBIOS scopes are <SPAN
|
||||
CLASS="emphasis"
|
||||
><I
|
||||
CLASS="EMPHASIS"
|
||||
>very</I
|
||||
></SPAN
|
||||
> rarely used, only set
|
||||
this parameter if you are the system administrator in charge of all
|
||||
the NetBIOS systems you communicate with. </P
|
||||
@ -426,14 +435,20 @@ CLASS="REPLACEABLE"
|
||||
><I
|
||||
>debuglevel</I
|
||||
></TT
|
||||
> is set to the letter 'A', then <I
|
||||
> is set to the letter 'A', then <SPAN
|
||||
CLASS="emphasis"
|
||||
><I
|
||||
CLASS="EMPHASIS"
|
||||
>all
|
||||
</I
|
||||
></SPAN
|
||||
> debug messages will be printed. This setting
|
||||
is for developers only (and people who <I
|
||||
is for developers only (and people who <SPAN
|
||||
CLASS="emphasis"
|
||||
><I
|
||||
CLASS="EMPHASIS"
|
||||
>really</I
|
||||
></SPAN
|
||||
> want
|
||||
to know how the code works internally). </P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
@ -595,21 +610,12 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
password used in the connection. The format of the file is
|
||||
</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
><TABLE
|
||||
BORDER="0"
|
||||
BGCOLOR="#E0E0E0"
|
||||
WIDTH="90%"
|
||||
><TR
|
||||
><TD
|
||||
><PRE
|
||||
CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING"
|
||||
>username = <value>
|
||||
password = <value>
|
||||
domain = <value>
|
||||
>username = <value>
|
||||
password = <value>
|
||||
domain = <value>
|
||||
</PRE
|
||||
></TD
|
||||
></TR
|
||||
></TABLE
|
||||
></P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>If the domain parameter is missing the current workgroup name
|
||||
@ -645,12 +651,18 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
> how to interpret
|
||||
filenames coming from the remote server. Usually Asian language
|
||||
multibyte UNIX implementations use different character sets than
|
||||
SMB/CIFS servers (<I
|
||||
SMB/CIFS servers (<SPAN
|
||||
CLASS="emphasis"
|
||||
><I
|
||||
CLASS="EMPHASIS"
|
||||
>EUC</I
|
||||
> instead of <I
|
||||
></SPAN
|
||||
> instead of <SPAN
|
||||
CLASS="emphasis"
|
||||
><I
|
||||
CLASS="EMPHASIS"
|
||||
> SJIS</I
|
||||
></SPAN
|
||||
> for example). Setting this parameter will let
|
||||
<B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
@ -864,9 +876,12 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
|
||||
></LI
|
||||
></UL
|
||||
><P
|
||||
><SPAN
|
||||
CLASS="emphasis"
|
||||
><I
|
||||
CLASS="EMPHASIS"
|
||||
>Tar Long File Names</I
|
||||
></SPAN
|
||||
></P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
><B
|
||||
@ -882,18 +897,24 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
files in the archive with relative names, not absolute names.
|
||||
</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
><SPAN
|
||||
CLASS="emphasis"
|
||||
><I
|
||||
CLASS="EMPHASIS"
|
||||
>Tar Filenames</I
|
||||
></SPAN
|
||||
></P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>All file names can be given as DOS path names (with '\'
|
||||
as the component separator) or as UNIX path names (with '/' as
|
||||
the component separator). </P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
><SPAN
|
||||
CLASS="emphasis"
|
||||
><I
|
||||
CLASS="EMPHASIS"
|
||||
>Examples</I
|
||||
></SPAN
|
||||
></P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Restore from tar file <TT
|
||||
@ -995,7 +1016,7 @@ NAME="AEN310"
|
||||
><P
|
||||
><TT
|
||||
CLASS="PROMPT"
|
||||
>smb:\> </TT
|
||||
>smb:\> </TT
|
||||
></P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>The backslash ("\") indicates the current working directory
|
||||
@ -1015,7 +1036,7 @@ CLASS="PROMPT"
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Parameters shown in square brackets (e.g., "[parameter]") are
|
||||
optional. If not given, the command will use suitable defaults. Parameters
|
||||
shown in angle brackets (e.g., "<parameter>") are required.
|
||||
shown in angle brackets (e.g., "<parameter>") are required.
|
||||
</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Note that all commands operating on the server are actually
|
||||
@ -1106,7 +1127,7 @@ CLASS="REPLACEABLE"
|
||||
directory on the server will be reported. </P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>del <mask></DT
|
||||
>del <mask></DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>The client will request that the server attempt
|
||||
@ -1119,7 +1140,7 @@ CLASS="REPLACEABLE"
|
||||
directory on the server. </P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>dir <mask></DT
|
||||
>dir <mask></DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>A list of the files matching <TT
|
||||
@ -1139,7 +1160,7 @@ CLASS="REPLACEABLE"
|
||||
from the program. </P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>get <remote file name> [local file name]</DT
|
||||
>get <remote file name> [local file name]</DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Copy the file called <TT
|
||||
@ -1204,13 +1225,13 @@ CLASS="REPLACEABLE"
|
||||
lowercase filenames are the norm on UNIX systems. </P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>ls <mask></DT
|
||||
>ls <mask></DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>See the dir command above. </P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>mask <mask></DT
|
||||
>mask <mask></DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>This command allows the user to set up a mask
|
||||
@ -1236,13 +1257,13 @@ CLASS="REPLACEABLE"
|
||||
mask back to "*" after using the mget or mput commands. </P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>md <directory name></DT
|
||||
>md <directory name></DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>See the mkdir command. </P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>mget <mask></DT
|
||||
>mget <mask></DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Copy all files matching <TT
|
||||
@ -1267,14 +1288,14 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
> are binary. See also the lowercase command. </P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>mkdir <directory name></DT
|
||||
>mkdir <directory name></DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Create a new directory on the server (user access
|
||||
privileges permitting) with the specified name. </P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>mput <mask></DT
|
||||
>mput <mask></DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Copy all files matching <TT
|
||||
@ -1300,7 +1321,7 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
are binary. </P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>print <file name></DT
|
||||
>print <file name></DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Print the specified file from the local machine
|
||||
@ -1309,7 +1330,7 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>See also the printmode command.</P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>printmode <graphics or text></DT
|
||||
>printmode <graphics or text></DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Set the print mode to suit either binary data
|
||||
@ -1329,7 +1350,7 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
</P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>put <local file name> [remote file name]</DT
|
||||
>put <local file name> [remote file name]</DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Copy the file called <TT
|
||||
@ -1361,7 +1382,7 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>See the exit command. </P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>rd <directory name></DT
|
||||
>rd <directory name></DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>See the rmdir command. </P
|
||||
@ -1386,7 +1407,7 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
using the mask command will be ignored. </P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>rm <mask></DT
|
||||
>rm <mask></DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Remove all files matching <TT
|
||||
@ -1398,14 +1419,14 @@ CLASS="REPLACEABLE"
|
||||
working directory on the server. </P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>rmdir <directory name></DT
|
||||
>rmdir <directory name></DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Remove the specified directory (user access
|
||||
privileges permitting) from the server. </P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>setmode <filename> <perm=[+|\-]rsha></DT
|
||||
>setmode <filename> <perm=[+|\-]rsha></DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>A version of the DOS attrib command to set
|
||||
@ -1430,7 +1451,7 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
</P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>tar <c|x>[IXbgNa]</DT
|
||||
>tar <c|x>[IXbgNa]</DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Performs a tar operation - see the <TT
|
||||
@ -1446,7 +1467,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
|
||||
</P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>blocksize <blocksize></DT
|
||||
>blocksize <blocksize></DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Blocksize. Must be followed by a valid (greater
|
||||
@ -1459,7 +1480,7 @@ CLASS="REPLACEABLE"
|
||||
>*TBLOCK (usually 512 byte) blocks. </P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>tarmode <full|inc|reset|noreset></DT
|
||||
>tarmode <full|inc|reset|noreset></DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Changes tar's behavior with regard to archive
|
||||
@ -1547,9 +1568,12 @@ CLASS="FILENAME"
|
||||
> /usr/samba/bin/</TT
|
||||
> directory, this directory readable
|
||||
by all, writeable only by root. The client program itself should
|
||||
be executable by all. The client should <I
|
||||
be executable by all. The client should <SPAN
|
||||
CLASS="emphasis"
|
||||
><I
|
||||
CLASS="EMPHASIS"
|
||||
>NOT</I
|
||||
></SPAN
|
||||
> be
|
||||
setuid or setgid! </P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
|
@ -191,7 +191,7 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>-S</B
|
||||
> parameter had been
|
||||
given.
|
||||
given.
|
||||
</P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
|
@ -1,11 +1,12 @@
|
||||
<!DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01 Transitional//EN">
|
||||
<!DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01//EN">
|
||||
<HTML
|
||||
><HEAD
|
||||
><TITLE
|
||||
>smbgroupedit</TITLE
|
||||
><META
|
||||
NAME="GENERATOR"
|
||||
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.77"></HEAD
|
||||
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.76b+
|
||||
"></HEAD
|
||||
><BODY
|
||||
CLASS="REFENTRY"
|
||||
BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF"
|
||||
@ -15,9 +16,7 @@ VLINK="#840084"
|
||||
ALINK="#0000FF"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="SMBGROUPEDIT"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>smbgroupedit</H1
|
||||
NAME="SMBGROUPEDIT">smbgroupedit</H1
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="REFNAMEDIV"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
@ -29,15 +28,13 @@ NAME="AEN5"
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="REFSYNOPSISDIV"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN8"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
NAME="AEN8"><H2
|
||||
>Synopsis</H2
|
||||
><P
|
||||
><B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>smbroupedit</B
|
||||
> [-v [l|s]] [-a UNIX-groupname [-d NT-groupname|-p privilege|]]</P
|
||||
> [-v [l|s]] [-a UNIX-groupname [-d NT-groupname|-p privilege|]]</P
|
||||
></DIV
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="REFSECT1"
|
||||
@ -89,6 +86,12 @@ CLASS="VARIABLELIST"
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>give a long listing, of the format:</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
><TABLE
|
||||
BORDER="0"
|
||||
BGCOLOR="#E0E0E0"
|
||||
WIDTH="90%"
|
||||
><TR
|
||||
><TD
|
||||
><PRE
|
||||
CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING"
|
||||
>"NT Group Name"
|
||||
@ -97,10 +100,19 @@ CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING"
|
||||
Group type :
|
||||
Comment :
|
||||
Privilege :</PRE
|
||||
></TD
|
||||
></TR
|
||||
></TABLE
|
||||
></P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>For examples,</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
><TABLE
|
||||
BORDER="0"
|
||||
BGCOLOR="#E0E0E0"
|
||||
WIDTH="90%"
|
||||
><TR
|
||||
><TD
|
||||
><PRE
|
||||
CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING"
|
||||
>Users
|
||||
@ -109,6 +121,9 @@ CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING"
|
||||
Group type: Local group
|
||||
Comment :
|
||||
Privilege : No privilege</PRE
|
||||
></TD
|
||||
></TR
|
||||
></TABLE
|
||||
></P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
@ -117,16 +132,34 @@ CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING"
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>display a short listing of the format:</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
><TABLE
|
||||
BORDER="0"
|
||||
BGCOLOR="#E0E0E0"
|
||||
WIDTH="90%"
|
||||
><TR
|
||||
><TD
|
||||
><PRE
|
||||
CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING"
|
||||
>NTGroupName(SID) -> UnixGroupName</PRE
|
||||
></TD
|
||||
></TR
|
||||
></TABLE
|
||||
></P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>For example,</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
><TABLE
|
||||
BORDER="0"
|
||||
BGCOLOR="#E0E0E0"
|
||||
WIDTH="90%"
|
||||
><TR
|
||||
><TD
|
||||
><PRE
|
||||
CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING"
|
||||
>Users (S-1-5-32-545) -> -1</PRE
|
||||
></TD
|
||||
></TR
|
||||
></TABLE
|
||||
></P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
></DL
|
||||
@ -211,6 +244,12 @@ TYPE="a"
|
||||
>Get the SID for the Windows NT "Domain Admins"
|
||||
group:</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
><TABLE
|
||||
BORDER="0"
|
||||
BGCOLOR="#E0E0E0"
|
||||
WIDTH="90%"
|
||||
><TR
|
||||
><TD
|
||||
><PRE
|
||||
CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING"
|
||||
><TT
|
||||
@ -221,6 +260,9 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>smbgroupedit -vs | grep "Domain Admins"</B
|
||||
>
|
||||
Domain Admins (S-1-5-21-1108995562-3116817432-1375597819-512) -> -1</PRE
|
||||
></TD
|
||||
></TR
|
||||
></TABLE
|
||||
></P
|
||||
></LI
|
||||
><LI
|
||||
@ -229,6 +271,12 @@ Domain Admins (S-1-5-21-1108995562-3116817432-1375597819-512) -> -1</PRE
|
||||
"Domain Admins" group, by running the command:
|
||||
</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
><TABLE
|
||||
BORDER="0"
|
||||
BGCOLOR="#E0E0E0"
|
||||
WIDTH="90%"
|
||||
><TR
|
||||
><TD
|
||||
><PRE
|
||||
CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING"
|
||||
><TT
|
||||
@ -238,16 +286,16 @@ CLASS="PROMPT"
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>smbgroupedit \
|
||||
-c S-1-5-21-1108995562-3116817432-1375597819-512 \
|
||||
-u domadm</B
|
||||
-u domadm -td</B
|
||||
></PRE
|
||||
></TD
|
||||
></TR
|
||||
></TABLE
|
||||
></P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
> <SPAN
|
||||
CLASS="emphasis"
|
||||
><I
|
||||
> <I
|
||||
CLASS="EMPHASIS"
|
||||
>warning:</I
|
||||
></SPAN
|
||||
> don't copy and paste this sample, the
|
||||
Domain Admins SID (the S-1-5-21-...-512) is different for every PDC.
|
||||
</P
|
||||
@ -258,6 +306,12 @@ CLASS="EMPHASIS"
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>To verify that your mapping has taken effect:</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
><TABLE
|
||||
BORDER="0"
|
||||
BGCOLOR="#E0E0E0"
|
||||
WIDTH="100%"
|
||||
><TR
|
||||
><TD
|
||||
><PRE
|
||||
CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING"
|
||||
><TT
|
||||
@ -268,12 +322,21 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>smbgroupedit -vs|grep "Domain Admins"</B
|
||||
>
|
||||
Domain Admins (S-1-5-21-1108995562-3116817432-1375597819-512) -> domadm</PRE
|
||||
></TD
|
||||
></TR
|
||||
></TABLE
|
||||
></P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>To give access to a certain directory on a domain member machine (an
|
||||
NT/W2K or a samba server running winbind) to some users who are member
|
||||
of a group on your samba PDC, flag that group as a domain group:</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
><TABLE
|
||||
BORDER="0"
|
||||
BGCOLOR="#E0E0E0"
|
||||
WIDTH="100%"
|
||||
><TR
|
||||
><TD
|
||||
><PRE
|
||||
CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING"
|
||||
><TT
|
||||
@ -283,6 +346,9 @@ CLASS="PROMPT"
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>smbgroupedit -a unixgroup -td</B
|
||||
></PRE
|
||||
></TD
|
||||
></TR
|
||||
></TABLE
|
||||
></P
|
||||
></DIV
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
|
@ -301,7 +301,7 @@ NAME="AEN73"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
>VERSION</H2
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>This man page is correct for version 2.2 of
|
||||
>This man page is correct for version 3.0 of
|
||||
the Samba suite.</P
|
||||
></DIV
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
|
@ -1,11 +1,12 @@
|
||||
<!DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01 Transitional//EN">
|
||||
<!DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01//EN">
|
||||
<HTML
|
||||
><HEAD
|
||||
><TITLE
|
||||
>smbsh</TITLE
|
||||
><META
|
||||
NAME="GENERATOR"
|
||||
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.77"></HEAD
|
||||
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.76b+
|
||||
"></HEAD
|
||||
><BODY
|
||||
CLASS="REFENTRY"
|
||||
BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF"
|
||||
@ -15,9 +16,7 @@ VLINK="#840084"
|
||||
ALINK="#0000FF"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="SMBSH"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>smbsh</H1
|
||||
NAME="SMBSH">smbsh</H1
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="REFNAMEDIV"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
@ -30,15 +29,13 @@ NAME="AEN5"
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="REFSYNOPSISDIV"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN8"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
NAME="AEN8"><H2
|
||||
>Synopsis</H2
|
||||
><P
|
||||
><B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>smbsh</B
|
||||
> [-W workgroup] [-U username] [-P prefix] [-R <name resolve order>] [-d <debug level>] [-l logfile] [-L libdir]</P
|
||||
> [-W workgroup] [-U username] [-P prefix] [-R <name resolve order>] [-d <debug level>] [-l logfile] [-L libdir]</P
|
||||
></DIV
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="REFSECT1"
|
||||
@ -115,17 +112,14 @@ CLASS="FILENAME"
|
||||
>This option allows
|
||||
the user to set the directory prefix for SMB access. The
|
||||
default value if this option is not specified is
|
||||
<SPAN
|
||||
CLASS="emphasis"
|
||||
><I
|
||||
<I
|
||||
CLASS="EMPHASIS"
|
||||
>smb</I
|
||||
></SPAN
|
||||
>.
|
||||
</P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>-R <name resolve order></DT
|
||||
>-R <name resolve order></DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>This option is used to determine what naming
|
||||
@ -236,7 +230,7 @@ CLASS="FILENAME"
|
||||
order. </P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>-d <debug level></DT
|
||||
>-d <debug level></DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>debug level is an integer from 0 to 10.</P
|
||||
@ -305,6 +299,12 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
that authenticates you to the machine running the Windows NT
|
||||
operating system.</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
><TABLE
|
||||
BORDER="0"
|
||||
BGCOLOR="#E0E0E0"
|
||||
WIDTH="100%"
|
||||
><TR
|
||||
><TD
|
||||
><PRE
|
||||
CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING"
|
||||
> <TT
|
||||
@ -335,6 +335,9 @@ CLASS="USERINPUT"
|
||||
></TT
|
||||
>
|
||||
</PRE
|
||||
></TD
|
||||
></TR
|
||||
></TABLE
|
||||
></P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Any dynamically linked command you execute from
|
||||
@ -354,7 +357,7 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
the workgroup MYGROUP. The command
|
||||
<B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>ls /smb/MYGROUP/<machine-name></B
|
||||
>ls /smb/MYGROUP/<machine-name></B
|
||||
> will show the share
|
||||
names for that machine. You could then, for example, use the <B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
@ -376,7 +379,7 @@ NAME="AEN112"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
>VERSION</H2
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>This man page is correct for version 2.2 of
|
||||
>This man page is correct for version 3.0 of
|
||||
the Samba suite.</P
|
||||
></DIV
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
|
@ -9,12 +9,15 @@ CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.77"><LINK
|
||||
REL="HOME"
|
||||
TITLE="SAMBA Project Documentation"
|
||||
HREF="samba-howto-collection.html"><LINK
|
||||
REL="UP"
|
||||
TITLE="Optional configuration"
|
||||
HREF="optional.html"><LINK
|
||||
REL="PREVIOUS"
|
||||
TITLE="Quick Cross Subnet Browsing / Cross Workgroup Browsing guide"
|
||||
HREF="browsing-quick.html"><LINK
|
||||
TITLE="Group mapping HOWTO"
|
||||
HREF="groupmapping.html"><LINK
|
||||
REL="NEXT"
|
||||
TITLE="HOWTO Access Samba source code via CVS"
|
||||
HREF="cvs-access.html"></HEAD
|
||||
TITLE="Appendixes"
|
||||
HREF="appendixes.html"></HEAD
|
||||
><BODY
|
||||
CLASS="CHAPTER"
|
||||
BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF"
|
||||
@ -42,7 +45,7 @@ WIDTH="10%"
|
||||
ALIGN="left"
|
||||
VALIGN="bottom"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
HREF="browsing-quick.html"
|
||||
HREF="groupmapping.html"
|
||||
ACCESSKEY="P"
|
||||
>Prev</A
|
||||
></TD
|
||||
@ -56,7 +59,7 @@ WIDTH="10%"
|
||||
ALIGN="right"
|
||||
VALIGN="bottom"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
HREF="cvs-access.html"
|
||||
HREF="appendixes.html"
|
||||
ACCESSKEY="N"
|
||||
>Next</A
|
||||
></TD
|
||||
@ -71,15 +74,15 @@ CLASS="CHAPTER"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="SPEED"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>Chapter 17. Samba performance issues</H1
|
||||
>Chapter 23. Samba performance issues</H1
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN2742"
|
||||
NAME="AEN3065"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>17.1. Comparisons</H1
|
||||
>23.1. Comparisons</H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>The Samba server uses TCP to talk to the client. Thus if you are
|
||||
trying to see if it performs well you should really compare it to
|
||||
@ -108,17 +111,17 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN2748"
|
||||
NAME="AEN3071"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>17.2. Oplocks</H1
|
||||
>23.2. Oplocks</H1
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN2750"
|
||||
NAME="AEN3073"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>17.2.1. Overview</H2
|
||||
>23.2.1. Overview</H2
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Oplocks are the way that SMB clients get permission from a server to
|
||||
locally cache file operations. If a server grants an oplock
|
||||
@ -152,9 +155,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN2758"
|
||||
NAME="AEN3081"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>17.2.2. Level2 Oplocks</H2
|
||||
>23.2.2. Level2 Oplocks</H2
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>With Samba 2.0.5 a new capability - level2 (read only) oplocks is
|
||||
supported (although the option is off by default - see the smb.conf
|
||||
@ -176,9 +179,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN2764"
|
||||
NAME="AEN3087"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>17.2.3. Old 'fake oplocks' option - deprecated</H2
|
||||
>23.2.3. Old 'fake oplocks' option - deprecated</H2
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Samba can also fake oplocks, by granting a oplock whenever a client
|
||||
asks for one. This is controlled using the smb.conf option "fake
|
||||
@ -197,9 +200,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN2768"
|
||||
NAME="AEN3091"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>17.3. Socket options</H1
|
||||
>23.3. Socket options</H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>There are a number of socket options that can greatly affect the
|
||||
performance of a TCP based server like Samba.</P
|
||||
@ -225,9 +228,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN2775"
|
||||
NAME="AEN3098"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>17.4. Read size</H1
|
||||
>23.4. Read size</H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>The option "read size" affects the overlap of disk reads/writes with
|
||||
network reads/writes. If the amount of data being transferred in
|
||||
@ -251,9 +254,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN2780"
|
||||
NAME="AEN3103"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>17.5. Max xmit</H1
|
||||
>23.5. Max xmit</H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>At startup the client and server negotiate a "maximum transmit" size,
|
||||
which limits the size of nearly all SMB commands. You can set the
|
||||
@ -274,9 +277,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN2785"
|
||||
NAME="AEN3108"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>17.6. Locking</H1
|
||||
>23.6. Locking</H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>By default Samba does not implement strict locking on each read/write
|
||||
call (although it did in previous versions). If you enable strict
|
||||
@ -291,9 +294,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN2789"
|
||||
NAME="AEN3112"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>17.7. Share modes</H1
|
||||
>23.7. Share modes</H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Some people find that opening files is very slow. This is often
|
||||
because of the "share modes" code needed to fully implement the dos
|
||||
@ -321,9 +324,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN2794"
|
||||
NAME="AEN3117"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>17.8. Log level</H1
|
||||
>23.8. Log level</H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>If you set the log level (also known as "debug level") higher than 2
|
||||
then you may suffer a large drop in performance. This is because the
|
||||
@ -335,9 +338,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN2797"
|
||||
NAME="AEN3120"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>17.9. Wide lines</H1
|
||||
>23.9. Wide lines</H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>The "wide links" option is now enabled by default, but if you disable
|
||||
it (for better security) then you may suffer a performance hit in
|
||||
@ -349,9 +352,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN2800"
|
||||
NAME="AEN3123"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>17.10. Read raw</H1
|
||||
>23.10. Read raw</H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>The "read raw" operation is designed to be an optimised, low-latency
|
||||
file read operation. A server may choose to not support it,
|
||||
@ -371,9 +374,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN2805"
|
||||
NAME="AEN3128"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>17.11. Write raw</H1
|
||||
>23.11. Write raw</H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>The "write raw" operation is designed to be an optimised, low-latency
|
||||
file write operation. A server may choose to not support it,
|
||||
@ -388,9 +391,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN2809"
|
||||
NAME="AEN3132"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>17.12. Read prediction</H1
|
||||
>23.12. Read prediction</H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Samba can do read prediction on some of the SMB commands. Read
|
||||
prediction means that Samba reads some extra data on the last file it
|
||||
@ -414,9 +417,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN2816"
|
||||
NAME="AEN3139"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>17.13. Memory mapping</H1
|
||||
>23.13. Memory mapping</H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Samba supports reading files via memory mapping them. One some
|
||||
machines this can give a large boost to performance, on others it
|
||||
@ -435,9 +438,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN2821"
|
||||
NAME="AEN3144"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>17.14. Slow Clients</H1
|
||||
>23.14. Slow Clients</H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>One person has reported that setting the protocol to COREPLUS rather
|
||||
than LANMAN2 gave a dramatic speed improvement (from 10k/s to 150k/s).</P
|
||||
@ -452,9 +455,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN2825"
|
||||
NAME="AEN3148"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>17.15. Slow Logins</H1
|
||||
>23.15. Slow Logins</H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Slow logins are almost always due to the password checking time. Using
|
||||
the lowest practical "password level" will improve things a lot. You
|
||||
@ -465,9 +468,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN2828"
|
||||
NAME="AEN3151"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>17.16. Client tuning</H1
|
||||
>23.16. Client tuning</H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Often a speed problem can be traced to the client. The client (for
|
||||
example Windows for Workgroups) can often be tuned for better TCP
|
||||
@ -569,9 +572,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN2860"
|
||||
NAME="AEN3183"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>17.17. My Results</H1
|
||||
>23.17. My Results</H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Some people want to see real numbers in a document like this, so here
|
||||
they are. I have a 486sx33 client running WfWg 3.11 with the 3.11b
|
||||
@ -610,7 +613,7 @@ WIDTH="33%"
|
||||
ALIGN="left"
|
||||
VALIGN="top"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
HREF="browsing-quick.html"
|
||||
HREF="groupmapping.html"
|
||||
ACCESSKEY="P"
|
||||
>Prev</A
|
||||
></TD
|
||||
@ -628,7 +631,7 @@ WIDTH="33%"
|
||||
ALIGN="right"
|
||||
VALIGN="top"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
HREF="cvs-access.html"
|
||||
HREF="appendixes.html"
|
||||
ACCESSKEY="N"
|
||||
>Next</A
|
||||
></TD
|
||||
@ -638,17 +641,21 @@ ACCESSKEY="N"
|
||||
WIDTH="33%"
|
||||
ALIGN="left"
|
||||
VALIGN="top"
|
||||
>Quick Cross Subnet Browsing / Cross Workgroup Browsing guide</TD
|
||||
>Group mapping HOWTO</TD
|
||||
><TD
|
||||
WIDTH="34%"
|
||||
ALIGN="center"
|
||||
VALIGN="top"
|
||||
> </TD
|
||||
><A
|
||||
HREF="optional.html"
|
||||
ACCESSKEY="U"
|
||||
>Up</A
|
||||
></TD
|
||||
><TD
|
||||
WIDTH="33%"
|
||||
ALIGN="right"
|
||||
VALIGN="top"
|
||||
>HOWTO Access Samba source code via CVS</TD
|
||||
>Appendixes</TD
|
||||
></TR
|
||||
></TABLE
|
||||
></DIV
|
||||
|
@ -9,12 +9,16 @@ CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.77"><LINK
|
||||
REL="HOME"
|
||||
TITLE="SAMBA Project Documentation"
|
||||
HREF="samba-howto-collection.html"><LINK
|
||||
REL="UP"
|
||||
TITLE="Optional configuration"
|
||||
HREF="optional.html"><LINK
|
||||
REL="PREVIOUS"
|
||||
TITLE="Hosting a Microsoft Distributed File System tree on Samba"
|
||||
HREF="msdfs.html"><LINK
|
||||
TITLE="Integrating MS Windows networks with Samba"
|
||||
HREF="integrate-ms-networks.html"><LINK
|
||||
REL="NEXT"
|
||||
TITLE="Printing Support in Samba 2.2.x"
|
||||
HREF="printing.html"></HEAD
|
||||
TITLE="Configuring PAM for distributed but centrally
|
||||
managed authentication"
|
||||
HREF="pam.html"></HEAD
|
||||
><BODY
|
||||
CLASS="CHAPTER"
|
||||
BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF"
|
||||
@ -42,7 +46,7 @@ WIDTH="10%"
|
||||
ALIGN="left"
|
||||
VALIGN="bottom"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
HREF="msdfs.html"
|
||||
HREF="integrate-ms-networks.html"
|
||||
ACCESSKEY="P"
|
||||
>Prev</A
|
||||
></TD
|
||||
@ -56,7 +60,7 @@ WIDTH="10%"
|
||||
ALIGN="right"
|
||||
VALIGN="bottom"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
HREF="printing.html"
|
||||
HREF="pam.html"
|
||||
ACCESSKEY="N"
|
||||
>Next</A
|
||||
></TD
|
||||
@ -71,15 +75,15 @@ CLASS="CHAPTER"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="UNIX-PERMISSIONS"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>Chapter 5. UNIX Permission Bits and Windows NT Access Control Lists</H1
|
||||
>Chapter 12. UNIX Permission Bits and Windows NT Access Control Lists</H1
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN580"
|
||||
NAME="AEN1618"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>5.1. Viewing and changing UNIX permissions using the NT
|
||||
>12.1. Viewing and changing UNIX permissions using the NT
|
||||
security dialogs</H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>New in the Samba 2.0.4 release is the ability for Windows
|
||||
@ -116,9 +120,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN589"
|
||||
NAME="AEN1627"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>5.2. How to view file security on a Samba share</H1
|
||||
>12.2. How to view file security on a Samba share</H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>From an NT 4.0 client, single-click with the right
|
||||
mouse button on any file or directory in a Samba mounted
|
||||
@ -186,9 +190,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN600"
|
||||
NAME="AEN1638"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>5.3. Viewing file ownership</H1
|
||||
>12.3. Viewing file ownership</H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Clicking on the <B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
@ -280,9 +284,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN620"
|
||||
NAME="AEN1658"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>5.4. Viewing file or directory permissions</H1
|
||||
>12.4. Viewing file or directory permissions</H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>The third button is the <B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
@ -342,9 +346,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN635"
|
||||
NAME="AEN1673"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>5.4.1. File Permissions</H2
|
||||
>12.4.1. File Permissions</H2
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>The standard UNIX user/group/world triple and
|
||||
the corresponding "read", "write", "execute" permissions
|
||||
@ -404,9 +408,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN649"
|
||||
NAME="AEN1687"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>5.4.2. Directory Permissions</H2
|
||||
>12.4.2. Directory Permissions</H2
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Directories on an NT NTFS file system have two
|
||||
different sets of permissions. The first set of permissions
|
||||
@ -436,9 +440,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN656"
|
||||
NAME="AEN1694"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>5.5. Modifying file or directory permissions</H1
|
||||
>12.5. Modifying file or directory permissions</H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Modifying file and directory permissions is as simple
|
||||
as changing the displayed permissions in the dialog box, and
|
||||
@ -534,9 +538,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN678"
|
||||
NAME="AEN1716"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>5.6. Interaction with the standard Samba create mask
|
||||
>12.6. Interaction with the standard Samba create mask
|
||||
parameters</H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Note that with Samba 2.0.5 there are four new parameters
|
||||
@ -811,9 +815,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN742"
|
||||
NAME="AEN1780"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>5.7. Interaction with the standard Samba file attribute
|
||||
>12.7. Interaction with the standard Samba file attribute
|
||||
mapping</H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Samba maps some of the DOS attribute bits (such as "read
|
||||
@ -870,7 +874,7 @@ WIDTH="33%"
|
||||
ALIGN="left"
|
||||
VALIGN="top"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
HREF="msdfs.html"
|
||||
HREF="integrate-ms-networks.html"
|
||||
ACCESSKEY="P"
|
||||
>Prev</A
|
||||
></TD
|
||||
@ -888,7 +892,7 @@ WIDTH="33%"
|
||||
ALIGN="right"
|
||||
VALIGN="top"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
HREF="printing.html"
|
||||
HREF="pam.html"
|
||||
ACCESSKEY="N"
|
||||
>Next</A
|
||||
></TD
|
||||
@ -898,17 +902,22 @@ ACCESSKEY="N"
|
||||
WIDTH="33%"
|
||||
ALIGN="left"
|
||||
VALIGN="top"
|
||||
>Hosting a Microsoft Distributed File System tree on Samba</TD
|
||||
>Integrating MS Windows networks with Samba</TD
|
||||
><TD
|
||||
WIDTH="34%"
|
||||
ALIGN="center"
|
||||
VALIGN="top"
|
||||
> </TD
|
||||
><A
|
||||
HREF="optional.html"
|
||||
ACCESSKEY="U"
|
||||
>Up</A
|
||||
></TD
|
||||
><TD
|
||||
WIDTH="33%"
|
||||
ALIGN="right"
|
||||
VALIGN="top"
|
||||
>Printing Support in Samba 2.2.x</TD
|
||||
>Configuring PAM for distributed but centrally
|
||||
managed authentication</TD
|
||||
></TR
|
||||
></TABLE
|
||||
></DIV
|
||||
|
@ -1,12 +1,11 @@
|
||||
<!DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01//EN">
|
||||
<!DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01 Transitional//EN">
|
||||
<HTML
|
||||
><HEAD
|
||||
><TITLE
|
||||
>wbinfo</TITLE
|
||||
><META
|
||||
NAME="GENERATOR"
|
||||
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.76b+
|
||||
"></HEAD
|
||||
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.77"></HEAD
|
||||
><BODY
|
||||
CLASS="REFENTRY"
|
||||
BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF"
|
||||
@ -16,7 +15,9 @@ VLINK="#840084"
|
||||
ALINK="#0000FF"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="WBINFO">wbinfo</H1
|
||||
NAME="WBINFO"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>wbinfo</H1
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="REFNAMEDIV"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
@ -28,13 +29,15 @@ NAME="AEN5"
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="REFSYNOPSISDIV"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN8"><H2
|
||||
NAME="AEN8"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
>Synopsis</H2
|
||||
><P
|
||||
><B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>wbinfo</B
|
||||
> [-u] [-g] [-i ip] [-N netbios-name] [-n name] [-s sid] [-U uid] [-G gid] [-S sid] [-Y sid] [-t] [-m] [-r user] [-a user%password] [-A user%password] [-p]</P
|
||||
> [-u] [-g] [-i ip] [-N netbios-name] [-n name] [-s sid] [-U uid] [-G gid] [-S sid] [-Y sid] [-t] [-m] [-r user] [-a user%password] [-A user%password] [-p]</P
|
||||
></DIV
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="REFSECT1"
|
||||
|
@ -1,175 +0,0 @@
|
||||
<HTML>
|
||||
<HEAD>
|
||||
<TITLE>Peter Karrer Announces SLIP for WFW</TITLE>
|
||||
</HEAD>
|
||||
<BODY>
|
||||
<H1><I>Winserve</I></H1>
|
||||
<HR>
|
||||
<H2><I>Peter Karrer Announces SLIP for WFW</I></H2>
|
||||
[NEW 03-22-95)
|
||||
<HR>
|
||||
<B>Hello,</B>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
I've discovered a way to run WfW's TCP/IP-32 over a SLIP packet driver. This
|
||||
allows WfW users to do Windows networking over dialup lines just like it is
|
||||
possible with NT and the Windows 95 beta!
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
For instance, you can mount Microsoft's FTP server as a network drive in File
|
||||
Manager or connect to an MS Mail post office over the Internet. Of course,
|
||||
the usual Internet stuff works as well. Another interesting site is
|
||||
WINSERVE.001; check out www.winserve.com.
|
||||
<HR>
|
||||
This method should work with any class 1 (Ethernet II) packet driver. However,
|
||||
I'm not in a position to try anything else than SLIPPER/CSLIPPER.
|
||||
<HR>
|
||||
<H3>Files you need:</H3>
|
||||
<B>WFWT32.EXE:</B> ftp://ftp.microsoft.com/bussys/msclient/wfw/wfwt32.exe
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
Microsoft's free TCP/IP for WfW. It's a self-extracting archive which
|
||||
should be executed in an empty directory.
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
<B>SLIPPER.EXE:</B> ftp://biocserver.bioc.cwru.edu/pub/dos/slipper/slippr15.zip
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
Peter Tattam's SLIP packet driver. CSLIPPER.EXE is a variant which supports
|
||||
VJ header compression.
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
<B>PDETHER.EXE:</B> ftp://sjf-lwp.idz.sjf.novell.com/odi/pdether/pde105.zip
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
Don Provan's ODI-over-Packet Driver shim. This *must* be version 1.05 (or
|
||||
above).
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
<B>LSL.COM:</B>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
Novell's LAN Support Layer. If you're an owner of Windows 3.10, you'll
|
||||
have it on one of your install disks. Use "expand a:lsl.co_ lsl.com" to
|
||||
expand it. Microsoft has stopped bundling LSL.COM with WfW 3.11, though.
|
||||
The newest version of LSL.COM can be downloaded as part of
|
||||
ftp://ftp.novell.com/pub/netware/nwos/dosclnt12/vlms/vlmup2.exe.
|
||||
However, it's not clear if this one may be legally used outside Netware
|
||||
environments.
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
<B>NET.CFG:</B>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
A configuration file for LSL and PDETHER. It should contain the following
|
||||
text:
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
<PRE>
|
||||
Link Support
|
||||
Buffers 8 1600
|
||||
Link Driver PDETHER
|
||||
Int 60
|
||||
Frame Ethernet_II
|
||||
Protocol IP 800 Ethernet_II
|
||||
Protocol ARP 806 Ethernet_II
|
||||
Protocol RARP 8035 Ethernet_II
|
||||
</PRE>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
<B>DISCOMX.COM:</B>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
A little hack of mine to disable the COM port used by the SLIP packet driver.
|
||||
Usage is e.g. "discomx 2" to disable COM2. This should be run before
|
||||
starting WfW, otherwise you'll get "device conflict" messages. Here it is:
|
||||
<P><PRE>
|
||||
begin 644 discomx.com
|
||||
F,=N)V8H.@`"P(+^!`/.N3XH="=MT!DN`XP/1XS')!R:)CP`$S2``
|
||||
`
|
||||
end
|
||||
</PRE>
|
||||
(Save this text to disk as <I>filename</I>, then run "uudecode <I>filename</I>".
|
||||
uudecode can be found, for instance, at
|
||||
ftp://ftp.switch.ch/mirror/simtel/msdos/starter/uudecode.com )
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
<B>LMHOSTS:</B>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
An optional file which should be stored in your Windows subdirectory. It is
|
||||
used to map NetBIOS computer names to IP addresses. Example:
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
<PRE>
|
||||
198.105.232.1 ftp #PRE # ftp.microsoft.com
|
||||
204.118.34.11 winserve.001 #PRE # Winserve
|
||||
</PRE>
|
||||
<HR>
|
||||
<H3>How to install it:</H3>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
<UL>
|
||||
<LI>Put the files mentioned above into a directory, e.g. C:\SLIP.
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
<LI>Put the following lines into AUTOEXEC.BAT:
|
||||
<P><PRE>
|
||||
cd \slip
|
||||
slipper com1 vec=60 baud=57600 ether (may vary with your modem setup)
|
||||
lsl
|
||||
pdether
|
||||
discomx 1 (must correspond to SLIPPER's COM port)
|
||||
</PRE>
|
||||
(If you use another vec= setting, you must update that in NET.CFG as well.)
|
||||
Use CSLIPPER instead of SLIPPER if your SLIP provider supports VJC.
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
<LI>Start WfW.
|
||||
<UL>
|
||||
<LI>Under Windows Setup, choose "Change Network Settings".
|
||||
<LI>Select "Install Microsoft Windows Network".
|
||||
<LI>In "Drivers...", choose "Add Adapter"
|
||||
and install the "IPXODI Support driver (Ethernet) [ODI/NDIS3]".
|
||||
<LI>In "Add Protocols...", select "Unlisted or Updated Protocol". When asked for a
|
||||
driver disk, enter the directory where you expanded WFWT32.EXE.
|
||||
<LI>Configure TCP/IP (IP address, enable LMHOSTS lookup, try 204.118.34.11 as primary
|
||||
WINS server). Remove all other protocols (NetBEUI, IPX/SPX).
|
||||
</UL>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
<LI>Windows will probably update the first lines of AUTOEXEC.BAT with
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
<PRE>
|
||||
c:\windows\net start
|
||||
c:\windows\odihlp.exe.
|
||||
</PRE>
|
||||
The "odihlp" line must be moved behind the "pdether" line.
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
<LI>Windows will also update NET.CFG with some "Frame" lines. These must
|
||||
be removed (except "Frame Ethernet_II").
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
<LI>Somehow, you will have to dial in to your SLIP provider. I do it manually
|
||||
before slipper (or cslipper) gets loaded, using a DOS-based terminal program.
|
||||
But there are some automatic dialers around. I've seen recommendations for
|
||||
ftp://mvmpc9.ciw.uni-karlsruhe.de/x-slip/slip_it.exe.
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
<LI>To connect to Microsoft's FTP server (or Winserve) go into File Manager,
|
||||
choose "Connect Network drive" and enter "\\ftp" or "\\winserve.001" into
|
||||
the "Path:" field.
|
||||
</UL>
|
||||
<HR>
|
||||
<H3>How it works:</H3>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
Microsoft's TCP/IP-32 requires an NDIS3 interface. NDIS is Microsoft's way
|
||||
to interface with a network.
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
WfW also contains an NDIS3-over-ODI "shim", whose real mode component is
|
||||
ODIHLP.EXE. ODI is Novell's way to interface with a network.
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
SLIPPER is a Packet Driver (PD) for use over serial lines. PDs are everybody
|
||||
else's way to interface with a network. SLIPPER's "ether" option makes it
|
||||
look like an Ethernet PD to applications using it.
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
A "shim" is a program which simulates a network application programming
|
||||
interface on top of another.
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
There is no NDIS SLIP driver which would work with WfW.
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
There is no NDIS-over-PD shim.
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
However, there's an ODI-over-PD shim (PDETHER) and an NDIS-over-ODI shim
|
||||
(ODIHLP etc.)
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
OK, so let's do NDIS-over-ODI-over-PD!
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
This should have worked all the time; however, a non-feature in PDETHER
|
||||
versions < 1.05 has prevented the method from functioning until now.
|
||||
<HR>
|
||||
<B>Questions, suggestions etc. please to
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
<PRE>
|
||||
Peter Karrer pkarrer@ife.ee.ethz.ch
|
||||
</PRE>
|
||||
</B>
|
||||
</BODY>
|
||||
</HTML>
|
@ -9,12 +9,15 @@ CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.77"><LINK
|
||||
REL="HOME"
|
||||
TITLE="SAMBA Project Documentation"
|
||||
HREF="samba-howto-collection.html"><LINK
|
||||
REL="UP"
|
||||
TITLE="Optional configuration"
|
||||
HREF="optional.html"><LINK
|
||||
REL="PREVIOUS"
|
||||
TITLE="security = domain in Samba 2.x"
|
||||
HREF="domain-security.html"><LINK
|
||||
TITLE="Printing Support"
|
||||
HREF="printing.html"><LINK
|
||||
REL="NEXT"
|
||||
TITLE="How to Configure Samba 2.2 as a Primary Domain Controller"
|
||||
HREF="samba-pdc.html"></HEAD
|
||||
TITLE="Passdb MySQL plugin"
|
||||
HREF="pdb-mysql.html"></HEAD
|
||||
><BODY
|
||||
CLASS="CHAPTER"
|
||||
BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF"
|
||||
@ -42,7 +45,7 @@ WIDTH="10%"
|
||||
ALIGN="left"
|
||||
VALIGN="bottom"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
HREF="domain-security.html"
|
||||
HREF="printing.html"
|
||||
ACCESSKEY="P"
|
||||
>Prev</A
|
||||
></TD
|
||||
@ -56,7 +59,7 @@ WIDTH="10%"
|
||||
ALIGN="right"
|
||||
VALIGN="bottom"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
HREF="samba-pdc.html"
|
||||
HREF="pdb-mysql.html"
|
||||
ACCESSKEY="N"
|
||||
>Next</A
|
||||
></TD
|
||||
@ -71,15 +74,15 @@ CLASS="CHAPTER"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="WINBIND"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>Chapter 10. Unified Logons between Windows NT and UNIX using Winbind</H1
|
||||
>Chapter 16. Unified Logons between Windows NT and UNIX using Winbind</H1
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN1255"
|
||||
NAME="AEN2238"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>10.1. Abstract</H1
|
||||
>16.1. Abstract</H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Integration of UNIX and Microsoft Windows NT through
|
||||
a unified logon has been considered a "holy grail" in heterogeneous
|
||||
@ -104,9 +107,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN1259"
|
||||
NAME="AEN2242"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>10.2. Introduction</H1
|
||||
>16.2. Introduction</H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>It is well known that UNIX and Microsoft Windows NT have
|
||||
different models for representing user and group information and
|
||||
@ -158,9 +161,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN1272"
|
||||
NAME="AEN2255"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>10.3. What Winbind Provides</H1
|
||||
>16.3. What Winbind Provides</H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Winbind unifies UNIX and Windows NT account management by
|
||||
allowing a UNIX box to become a full member of a NT domain. Once
|
||||
@ -200,9 +203,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN1279"
|
||||
NAME="AEN2262"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>10.3.1. Target Uses</H2
|
||||
>16.3.1. Target Uses</H2
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Winbind is targeted at organizations that have an
|
||||
existing NT based domain infrastructure into which they wish
|
||||
@ -224,9 +227,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN1283"
|
||||
NAME="AEN2266"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>10.4. How Winbind Works</H1
|
||||
>16.4. How Winbind Works</H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>The winbind system is designed around a client/server
|
||||
architecture. A long running <B
|
||||
@ -244,9 +247,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN1288"
|
||||
NAME="AEN2271"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>10.4.1. Microsoft Remote Procedure Calls</H2
|
||||
>16.4.1. Microsoft Remote Procedure Calls</H2
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Over the last two years, efforts have been underway
|
||||
by various Samba Team members to decode various aspects of
|
||||
@ -270,9 +273,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN1292"
|
||||
NAME="AEN2275"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>10.4.2. Name Service Switch</H2
|
||||
>16.4.2. Name Service Switch</H2
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>The Name Service Switch, or NSS, is a feature that is
|
||||
present in many UNIX operating systems. It allows system
|
||||
@ -350,9 +353,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN1308"
|
||||
NAME="AEN2291"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>10.4.3. Pluggable Authentication Modules</H2
|
||||
>16.4.3. Pluggable Authentication Modules</H2
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Pluggable Authentication Modules, also known as PAM,
|
||||
is a system for abstracting authentication and authorization
|
||||
@ -399,9 +402,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN1316"
|
||||
NAME="AEN2299"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>10.4.4. User and Group ID Allocation</H2
|
||||
>16.4.4. User and Group ID Allocation</H2
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>When a user or group is created under Windows NT
|
||||
is it allocated a numerical relative identifier (RID). This is
|
||||
@ -425,9 +428,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN1320"
|
||||
NAME="AEN2303"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>10.4.5. Result Caching</H2
|
||||
>16.4.5. Result Caching</H2
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>An active system can generate a lot of user and group
|
||||
name lookups. To reduce the network cost of these lookups winbind
|
||||
@ -448,9 +451,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN1323"
|
||||
NAME="AEN2306"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>10.5. Installation and Configuration</H1
|
||||
>16.5. Installation and Configuration</H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Many thanks to John Trostel <A
|
||||
HREF="mailto:jtrostel@snapserver.com"
|
||||
@ -475,9 +478,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN1330"
|
||||
NAME="AEN2313"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>10.5.1. Introduction</H2
|
||||
>16.5.1. Introduction</H2
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>This HOWTO describes the procedures used to get winbind up and
|
||||
running on my RedHat 7.1 system. Winbind is capable of providing access
|
||||
@ -534,9 +537,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN1343"
|
||||
NAME="AEN2326"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>10.5.2. Requirements</H2
|
||||
>16.5.2. Requirements</H2
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>If you have a samba configuration file that you are currently
|
||||
using... <SPAN
|
||||
@ -574,7 +577,7 @@ CLASS="FILENAME"
|
||||
> back to the original state they were in if
|
||||
you get frustrated with the way things are going. ;-)</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>The latest version of SAMBA (version 2.2.2 as of this writing), now
|
||||
>The latest version of SAMBA (version 3.0 as of this writing), now
|
||||
includes a functioning winbindd daemon. Please refer to the
|
||||
<A
|
||||
HREF="http://samba.org/"
|
||||
@ -604,9 +607,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN1357"
|
||||
NAME="AEN2340"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>10.5.3. Testing Things Out</H2
|
||||
>16.5.3. Testing Things Out</H2
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Before starting, it is probably best to kill off all the SAMBA
|
||||
related daemons running on your server. Kill off all <B
|
||||
@ -649,9 +652,9 @@ CLASS="SECT3"
|
||||
><H3
|
||||
CLASS="SECT3"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN1368"
|
||||
NAME="AEN2351"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>10.5.3.1. Configure and compile SAMBA</H3
|
||||
>16.5.3.1. Configure and compile SAMBA</H3
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>The configuration and compilation of SAMBA is pretty straightforward.
|
||||
The first three steps may not be necessary depending upon
|
||||
@ -715,9 +718,9 @@ CLASS="SECT3"
|
||||
><H3
|
||||
CLASS="SECT3"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN1387"
|
||||
NAME="AEN2370"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>10.5.3.2. Configure <TT
|
||||
>16.5.3.2. Configure <TT
|
||||
CLASS="FILENAME"
|
||||
>nsswitch.conf</TT
|
||||
> and the
|
||||
@ -820,9 +823,9 @@ CLASS="SECT3"
|
||||
><H3
|
||||
CLASS="SECT3"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN1420"
|
||||
NAME="AEN2403"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>10.5.3.3. Configure smb.conf</H3
|
||||
>16.5.3.3. Configure smb.conf</H3
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Several parameters are needed in the smb.conf file to control
|
||||
the behavior of <B
|
||||
@ -895,9 +898,9 @@ CLASS="SECT3"
|
||||
><H3
|
||||
CLASS="SECT3"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN1436"
|
||||
NAME="AEN2419"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>10.5.3.4. Join the SAMBA server to the PDC domain</H3
|
||||
>16.5.3.4. Join the SAMBA server to the PDC domain</H3
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Enter the following command to make the SAMBA server join the
|
||||
PDC domain, where <TT
|
||||
@ -919,7 +922,7 @@ CLASS="PROMPT"
|
||||
>root#</TT
|
||||
> <B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>/usr/local/samba/bin/net rpc join -s PDC -U Administrator</B
|
||||
>/usr/local/samba/bin/net rpc join -S PDC -U Administrator</B
|
||||
></P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>The proper response to the command should be: "Joined the domain
|
||||
@ -941,9 +944,9 @@ CLASS="SECT3"
|
||||
><H3
|
||||
CLASS="SECT3"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN1447"
|
||||
NAME="AEN2430"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>10.5.3.5. Start up the winbindd daemon and test it!</H3
|
||||
>16.5.3.5. Start up the winbindd daemon and test it!</H3
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Eventually, you will want to modify your smb startup script to
|
||||
automatically invoke the winbindd daemon when the other parts of
|
||||
@ -1064,17 +1067,17 @@ CLASS="SECT3"
|
||||
><H3
|
||||
CLASS="SECT3"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN1483"
|
||||
NAME="AEN2466"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>10.5.3.6. Fix the init.d startup scripts</H3
|
||||
>16.5.3.6. Fix the init.d startup scripts</H3
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="SECT4"
|
||||
><H4
|
||||
CLASS="SECT4"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN1485"
|
||||
NAME="AEN2468"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>10.5.3.6.1. Linux</H4
|
||||
>16.5.3.6.1. Linux</H4
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>The <B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
@ -1168,9 +1171,9 @@ CLASS="SECT4"
|
||||
><H4
|
||||
CLASS="SECT4"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN1502"
|
||||
NAME="AEN2485"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>10.5.3.6.2. Solaris</H4
|
||||
>16.5.3.6.2. Solaris</H4
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>On solaris, you need to modify the
|
||||
<TT
|
||||
@ -1239,9 +1242,9 @@ CLASS="SECT4"
|
||||
><H4
|
||||
CLASS="SECT4"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN1509"
|
||||
NAME="AEN2492"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>10.5.3.6.3. Restarting</H4
|
||||
>16.5.3.6.3. Restarting</H4
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>If you restart the <B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
@ -1263,9 +1266,9 @@ CLASS="SECT3"
|
||||
><H3
|
||||
CLASS="SECT3"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN1515"
|
||||
NAME="AEN2498"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>10.5.3.7. Configure Winbind and PAM</H3
|
||||
>16.5.3.7. Configure Winbind and PAM</H3
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>If you have made it this far, you know that winbindd and samba are working
|
||||
together. If you want to use winbind to provide authentication for other
|
||||
@ -1321,9 +1324,9 @@ CLASS="SECT4"
|
||||
><H4
|
||||
CLASS="SECT4"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN1532"
|
||||
NAME="AEN2515"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>10.5.3.7.1. Linux/FreeBSD-specific PAM configuration</H4
|
||||
>16.5.3.7.1. Linux/FreeBSD-specific PAM configuration</H4
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>The <TT
|
||||
CLASS="FILENAME"
|
||||
@ -1450,9 +1453,9 @@ CLASS="SECT4"
|
||||
><H4
|
||||
CLASS="SECT4"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN1565"
|
||||
NAME="AEN2548"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>10.5.3.7.2. Solaris-specific configuration</H4
|
||||
>16.5.3.7.2. Solaris-specific configuration</H4
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>The /etc/pam.conf needs to be changed. I changed this file so that my Domain
|
||||
users can logon both locally as well as telnet.The following are the changes
|
||||
@ -1537,9 +1540,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN1572"
|
||||
NAME="AEN2555"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>10.6. Limitations</H1
|
||||
>16.6. Limitations</H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Winbind has a number of limitations in its current
|
||||
released version that we hope to overcome in future
|
||||
@ -1578,9 +1581,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN1582"
|
||||
NAME="AEN2565"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>10.7. Conclusion</H1
|
||||
>16.7. Conclusion</H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>The winbind system, through the use of the Name Service
|
||||
Switch, Pluggable Authentication Modules, and appropriate
|
||||
@ -1606,7 +1609,7 @@ WIDTH="33%"
|
||||
ALIGN="left"
|
||||
VALIGN="top"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
HREF="domain-security.html"
|
||||
HREF="printing.html"
|
||||
ACCESSKEY="P"
|
||||
>Prev</A
|
||||
></TD
|
||||
@ -1624,7 +1627,7 @@ WIDTH="33%"
|
||||
ALIGN="right"
|
||||
VALIGN="top"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
HREF="samba-pdc.html"
|
||||
HREF="pdb-mysql.html"
|
||||
ACCESSKEY="N"
|
||||
>Next</A
|
||||
></TD
|
||||
@ -1634,17 +1637,21 @@ ACCESSKEY="N"
|
||||
WIDTH="33%"
|
||||
ALIGN="left"
|
||||
VALIGN="top"
|
||||
>security = domain in Samba 2.x</TD
|
||||
>Printing Support</TD
|
||||
><TD
|
||||
WIDTH="34%"
|
||||
ALIGN="center"
|
||||
VALIGN="top"
|
||||
> </TD
|
||||
><A
|
||||
HREF="optional.html"
|
||||
ACCESSKEY="U"
|
||||
>Up</A
|
||||
></TD
|
||||
><TD
|
||||
WIDTH="33%"
|
||||
ALIGN="right"
|
||||
VALIGN="top"
|
||||
>How to Configure Samba 2.2 as a Primary Domain Controller</TD
|
||||
>Passdb MySQL plugin</TD
|
||||
></TR
|
||||
></TABLE
|
||||
></DIV
|
||||
|
@ -1,11 +1,12 @@
|
||||
<!DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01 Transitional//EN">
|
||||
<!DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01//EN">
|
||||
<HTML
|
||||
><HEAD
|
||||
><TITLE
|
||||
>winbindd</TITLE
|
||||
><META
|
||||
NAME="GENERATOR"
|
||||
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.77"></HEAD
|
||||
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.76b+
|
||||
"></HEAD
|
||||
><BODY
|
||||
CLASS="REFENTRY"
|
||||
BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF"
|
||||
@ -15,9 +16,7 @@ VLINK="#840084"
|
||||
ALINK="#0000FF"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="WINBINDD"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>winbindd</H1
|
||||
NAME="WINBINDD">winbindd</H1
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="REFNAMEDIV"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
@ -30,20 +29,18 @@ NAME="AEN5"
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="REFSYNOPSISDIV"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN8"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
NAME="AEN8"><H2
|
||||
>Synopsis</H2
|
||||
><P
|
||||
><B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>winbindd</B
|
||||
> [-i] [-d <debug level>] [-s <smb config file>]</P
|
||||
> [-F] [-S] [-i] [-B] [-d <debug level>] [-s <smb config file>] [-n]</P
|
||||
></DIV
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="REFSECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN14"
|
||||
NAME="AEN18"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
>DESCRIPTION</H2
|
||||
@ -171,11 +168,20 @@ CLASS="FILENAME"
|
||||
> and then from the
|
||||
Windows NT server. </P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
><TABLE
|
||||
BORDER="0"
|
||||
BGCOLOR="#E0E0E0"
|
||||
WIDTH="100%"
|
||||
><TR
|
||||
><TD
|
||||
><PRE
|
||||
CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING"
|
||||
>passwd: files winbind
|
||||
group: files winbind
|
||||
</PRE
|
||||
></TD
|
||||
></TR
|
||||
></TABLE
|
||||
></P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>The following simple configuration in the
|
||||
@ -192,7 +198,7 @@ CLASS="FILENAME"
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="REFSECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN57"
|
||||
NAME="AEN61"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
>OPTIONS</H2
|
||||
@ -202,6 +208,48 @@ NAME="AEN57"
|
||||
CLASS="VARIABLELIST"
|
||||
><DL
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>-F</DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>If specified, this parameter causes
|
||||
the main <B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>winbindd</B
|
||||
> process to not daemonize,
|
||||
i.e. double-fork and disassociate with the terminal.
|
||||
Child processes are still created as normal to service
|
||||
each connection request, but the main process does not
|
||||
exit. This operation mode is suitable for running
|
||||
<B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>winbindd</B
|
||||
> under process supervisors such
|
||||
as <B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>supervise</B
|
||||
> and <B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>svscan</B
|
||||
>
|
||||
from Daniel J. Bernstein's <B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>daemontools</B
|
||||
>
|
||||
package, or the AIX process monitor.
|
||||
</P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>-S</DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>If specified, this parameter causes
|
||||
<B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>winbindd</B
|
||||
> to log to standard output rather
|
||||
than a file.</P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>-d debuglevel</DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
@ -223,7 +271,49 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
of <B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>winbindd</B
|
||||
> is required. </P
|
||||
> is required.
|
||||
<B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>winbindd</B
|
||||
> also logs to standard output,
|
||||
as if the <B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>-S</B
|
||||
> parameter had been given.
|
||||
</P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>-n</DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Disable caching. This means winbindd will
|
||||
always have to wait for a response from the domain controller
|
||||
before it can respond to a client and this thus makes things
|
||||
slower. The results will however be more accurate, since
|
||||
results from the cache might not be up-to-date. This
|
||||
might also temporarily hang winbindd if the DC doesn't respond.
|
||||
</P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>-B</DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Dual daemon mode. This means winbindd will run
|
||||
as 2 threads. The first will answer all requests from the cache,
|
||||
thus making responses to clients faster. The other will
|
||||
update the cache for the query that the first has just responded.
|
||||
Advantage of this is that responses are accurate and fast.
|
||||
</P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>-s|--conf=smb.conf</DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Specifies the location of the all-important
|
||||
<TT
|
||||
CLASS="FILENAME"
|
||||
>smb.conf</TT
|
||||
> file. </P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
></DL
|
||||
></DIV
|
||||
@ -231,7 +321,7 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="REFSECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN70"
|
||||
NAME="AEN103"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
>NAME AND ID RESOLUTION</H2
|
||||
@ -262,7 +352,7 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="REFSECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN76"
|
||||
NAME="AEN109"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
>CONFIGURATION</H2
|
||||
@ -402,7 +492,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="REFSECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN118"
|
||||
NAME="AEN151"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
>EXAMPLE SETUP</H2
|
||||
@ -417,11 +507,20 @@ CLASS="FILENAME"
|
||||
> put the
|
||||
following:</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
><TABLE
|
||||
BORDER="0"
|
||||
BGCOLOR="#E0E0E0"
|
||||
WIDTH="100%"
|
||||
><TR
|
||||
><TD
|
||||
><PRE
|
||||
CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING"
|
||||
>passwd: files winbind
|
||||
group: files winbind
|
||||
</PRE
|
||||
></TD
|
||||
></TR
|
||||
></TABLE
|
||||
></P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>In <TT
|
||||
@ -435,6 +534,12 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
|
||||
></TT
|
||||
> lines with something like this: </P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
><TABLE
|
||||
BORDER="0"
|
||||
BGCOLOR="#E0E0E0"
|
||||
WIDTH="100%"
|
||||
><TR
|
||||
><TD
|
||||
><PRE
|
||||
CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING"
|
||||
>auth required /lib/security/pam_securetty.so
|
||||
@ -442,6 +547,9 @@ auth required /lib/security/pam_nologin.so
|
||||
auth sufficient /lib/security/pam_winbind.so
|
||||
auth required /lib/security/pam_pwdb.so use_first_pass shadow nullok
|
||||
</PRE
|
||||
></TD
|
||||
></TR
|
||||
></TABLE
|
||||
></P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Note in particular the use of the <TT
|
||||
@ -522,6 +630,12 @@ CLASS="FILENAME"
|
||||
> containing directives like the
|
||||
following: </P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
><TABLE
|
||||
BORDER="0"
|
||||
BGCOLOR="#E0E0E0"
|
||||
WIDTH="100%"
|
||||
><TR
|
||||
><TD
|
||||
><PRE
|
||||
CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING"
|
||||
>[global]
|
||||
@ -535,6 +649,9 @@ CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING"
|
||||
security = domain
|
||||
password server = *
|
||||
</PRE
|
||||
></TD
|
||||
></TR
|
||||
></TABLE
|
||||
></P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Now start winbindd and you should find that your user and
|
||||
@ -553,7 +670,7 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="REFSECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN157"
|
||||
NAME="AEN190"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
>NOTES</H2
|
||||
@ -611,7 +728,7 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="REFSECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN173"
|
||||
NAME="AEN206"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
>SIGNALS</H2
|
||||
@ -662,7 +779,7 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="REFSECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN190"
|
||||
NAME="AEN223"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
>FILES</H2
|
||||
@ -738,18 +855,18 @@ CLASS="FILENAME"
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="REFSECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN219"
|
||||
NAME="AEN252"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
>VERSION</H2
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>This man page is correct for version 2.2 of
|
||||
>This man page is correct for version 3.0 of
|
||||
the Samba suite.</P
|
||||
></DIV
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="REFSECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN222"
|
||||
NAME="AEN255"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
>SEE ALSO</H2
|
||||
@ -777,7 +894,7 @@ TARGET="_top"
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="REFSECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN229"
|
||||
NAME="AEN262"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
>AUTHOR</H2
|
||||
|
@ -3,7 +3,7 @@
|
||||
.\" <http://shell.ipoline.com/~elmert/comp/docbook2X/>
|
||||
.\" Please send any bug reports, improvements, comments, patches,
|
||||
.\" etc. to Steve Cheng <steve@ggi-project.org>.
|
||||
.TH "FINDSMB" "1" "26 November 2002" "" ""
|
||||
.TH "FINDSMB" "1" "05 November 2002" "" ""
|
||||
.SH NAME
|
||||
findsmb \- list info about machines that respond to SMB name queries on a subnet
|
||||
.SH SYNOPSIS
|
||||
|
@ -3,7 +3,7 @@
|
||||
.\" <http://shell.ipoline.com/~elmert/comp/docbook2X/>
|
||||
.\" Please send any bug reports, improvements, comments, patches,
|
||||
.\" etc. to Steve Cheng <steve@ggi-project.org>.
|
||||
.TH "LMHOSTS" "5" "01 October 2002" "" ""
|
||||
.TH "LMHOSTS" "5" "05 November 2002" "" ""
|
||||
.SH NAME
|
||||
lmhosts \- The Samba NetBIOS hosts file
|
||||
.SH SYNOPSIS
|
||||
|
@ -3,7 +3,7 @@
|
||||
.\" <http://shell.ipoline.com/~elmert/comp/docbook2X/>
|
||||
.\" Please send any bug reports, improvements, comments, patches,
|
||||
.\" etc. to Steve Cheng <steve@ggi-project.org>.
|
||||
.TH "NET" "8" "03 October 2002" "" ""
|
||||
.TH "NET" "8" "05 November 2002" "" ""
|
||||
.SH NAME
|
||||
net \- Tool for administration of Samba and remote CIFS servers.
|
||||
.SH SYNOPSIS
|
||||
|
@ -3,7 +3,7 @@
|
||||
.\" <http://shell.ipoline.com/~elmert/comp/docbook2X/>
|
||||
.\" Please send any bug reports, improvements, comments, patches,
|
||||
.\" etc. to Steve Cheng <steve@ggi-project.org>.
|
||||
.TH "NMBLOOKUP" "1" "26 November 2002" "" ""
|
||||
.TH "NMBLOOKUP" "1" "05 November 2002" "" ""
|
||||
.SH NAME
|
||||
nmblookup \- NetBIOS over TCP/IP client used to lookup NetBIOS names
|
||||
.SH SYNOPSIS
|
||||
|
@ -210,6 +210,41 @@ Example: \fBpdbedit -P "bad lockout attempt" -V 3\fR
|
||||
account policy value for bad lockout attempt is now 3
|
||||
|
||||
.fi
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
\fB-d|--debug=debuglevel\fR
|
||||
\fIdebuglevel\fR is an integer
|
||||
from 0 to 10. The default value if this parameter is
|
||||
not specified is zero.
|
||||
|
||||
The higher this value, the more detail will be
|
||||
logged to the log files about the activities of the
|
||||
server. At level 0, only critical errors and serious
|
||||
warnings will be logged. Level 1 is a reasonable level for
|
||||
day to day running - it generates a small amount of
|
||||
information about operations carried out.
|
||||
|
||||
Levels above 1 will generate considerable
|
||||
amounts of log data, and should only be used when
|
||||
investigating a problem. Levels above 3 are designed for
|
||||
use only by developers and generate HUGE amounts of log
|
||||
data, most of which is extremely cryptic.
|
||||
|
||||
Note that specifying this parameter here will
|
||||
override the log
|
||||
level file.
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
\fB-h|--help\fR
|
||||
Print a summary of command line options.
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
\fB-s <configuration file>\fR
|
||||
The file specified contains the
|
||||
configuration details required by the server. The
|
||||
information in this file includes server-specific
|
||||
information such as what printcap file to use, as well
|
||||
as descriptions of all the services that the server is
|
||||
to provide. See \fIsmb.conf(5)\fR for more information.
|
||||
The default configuration file name is determined at
|
||||
compile time.
|
||||
.SH "NOTES"
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
This command may be used only by root.
|
||||
|
@ -3,7 +3,7 @@
|
||||
.\" <http://shell.ipoline.com/~elmert/comp/docbook2X/>
|
||||
.\" Please send any bug reports, improvements, comments, patches,
|
||||
.\" etc. to Steve Cheng <steve@ggi-project.org>.
|
||||
.TH "RPCCLIENT" "1" "26 November 2002" "" ""
|
||||
.TH "RPCCLIENT" "1" "05 November 2002" "" ""
|
||||
.SH NAME
|
||||
rpcclient \- tool for executing client side MS-RPC functions
|
||||
.SH SYNOPSIS
|
||||
@ -47,6 +47,31 @@ access from unwanted users.
|
||||
execute semicolon separated commands (listed
|
||||
below))
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
\fB-d|--debug=debuglevel\fR
|
||||
\fIdebuglevel\fR is an integer
|
||||
from 0 to 10. The default value if this parameter is
|
||||
not specified is zero.
|
||||
|
||||
The higher this value, the more detail will be
|
||||
logged to the log files about the activities of the
|
||||
server. At level 0, only critical errors and serious
|
||||
warnings will be logged. Level 1 is a reasonable level for
|
||||
day to day running - it generates a small amount of
|
||||
information about operations carried out.
|
||||
|
||||
Levels above 1 will generate considerable
|
||||
amounts of log data, and should only be used when
|
||||
investigating a problem. Levels above 3 are designed for
|
||||
use only by developers and generate HUGE amounts of log
|
||||
data, most of which is extremely cryptic.
|
||||
|
||||
Note that specifying this parameter here will
|
||||
override the log
|
||||
level file.
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
\fB-h|--help\fR
|
||||
Print a summary of command line options.
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
\fB-I IP-address\fR
|
||||
\fIIP address\fR is the address of the server to connect to.
|
||||
It should be specified in standard "a.b.c.d" notation.
|
||||
|
@ -3,7 +3,7 @@
|
||||
.\" <http://shell.ipoline.com/~elmert/comp/docbook2X/>
|
||||
.\" Please send any bug reports, improvements, comments, patches,
|
||||
.\" etc. to Steve Cheng <steve@ggi-project.org>.
|
||||
.TH "SAMBA" "7" "01 October 2002" "" ""
|
||||
.TH "SAMBA" "7" "05 November 2002" "" ""
|
||||
.SH NAME
|
||||
SAMBA \- A Windows SMB/CIFS fileserver for UNIX
|
||||
.SH SYNOPSIS
|
||||
|
@ -3,7 +3,7 @@
|
||||
.\" <http://shell.ipoline.com/~elmert/comp/docbook2X/>
|
||||
.\" Please send any bug reports, improvements, comments, patches,
|
||||
.\" etc. to Steve Cheng <steve@ggi-project.org>.
|
||||
.TH "SMB.CONF" "5" "27 December 2002" "" ""
|
||||
.TH "SMB.CONF" "5" "29 December 2002" "" ""
|
||||
.SH NAME
|
||||
smb.conf \- The configuration file for the Samba suite
|
||||
.SH "SYNOPSIS"
|
||||
@ -4725,9 +4725,9 @@ This is a boolean option that controls whether
|
||||
connections with usernames not in the \fIuser\fR
|
||||
list will be allowed. By default this option is disabled so that a
|
||||
client can supply a username to be used by the server. Enabling
|
||||
this parameter will force the server to only use the login
|
||||
this parameter will force the server to only user the login
|
||||
names from the \fIuser\fR list and is only really
|
||||
useful in share level
|
||||
useful in shave level
|
||||
security.
|
||||
|
||||
Note that this also means Samba won't try to deduce
|
||||
|
@ -3,7 +3,7 @@
|
||||
.\" <http://shell.ipoline.com/~elmert/comp/docbook2X/>
|
||||
.\" Please send any bug reports, improvements, comments, patches,
|
||||
.\" etc. to Steve Cheng <steve@ggi-project.org>.
|
||||
.TH "SMBCACLS" "1" "01 October 2002" "" ""
|
||||
.TH "SMBCACLS" "1" "05 November 2002" "" ""
|
||||
.SH NAME
|
||||
smbcacls \- Set or get ACLs on an NT file or directory names
|
||||
.SH SYNOPSIS
|
||||
|
@ -3,7 +3,7 @@
|
||||
.\" <http://shell.ipoline.com/~elmert/comp/docbook2X/>
|
||||
.\" Please send any bug reports, improvements, comments, patches,
|
||||
.\" etc. to Steve Cheng <steve@ggi-project.org>.
|
||||
.TH "SMBCLIENT" "1" "26 November 2002" "" ""
|
||||
.TH "SMBCLIENT" "1" "05 November 2002" "" ""
|
||||
.SH NAME
|
||||
smbclient \- ftp-like client to access SMB/CIFS resources on servers
|
||||
.SH SYNOPSIS
|
||||
|
@ -3,7 +3,7 @@
|
||||
.\" <http://shell.ipoline.com/~elmert/comp/docbook2X/>
|
||||
.\" Please send any bug reports, improvements, comments, patches,
|
||||
.\" etc. to Steve Cheng <steve@ggi-project.org>.
|
||||
.TH "SMBCONTROL" "1" "01 October 2002" "" ""
|
||||
.TH "SMBCONTROL" "1" "05 November 2002" "" ""
|
||||
.SH NAME
|
||||
smbcontrol \- send messages to smbd, nmbd or winbindd processes
|
||||
.SH SYNOPSIS
|
||||
|
@ -84,7 +84,7 @@ server is executed on the command line of a shell. Setting this
|
||||
parameter negates the implicit deamon mode when run from the
|
||||
command line. \fBsmbd\fR also logs to standard
|
||||
output, as if the \fB-S\fR parameter had been
|
||||
given.
|
||||
given.
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
\fB-h\fR
|
||||
Prints the help information (usage)
|
||||
|
@ -3,7 +3,7 @@
|
||||
.\" <http://shell.ipoline.com/~elmert/comp/docbook2X/>
|
||||
.\" Please send any bug reports, improvements, comments, patches,
|
||||
.\" etc. to Steve Cheng <steve@ggi-project.org>.
|
||||
.TH "SMBMNT" "8" "01 October 2002" "" ""
|
||||
.TH "SMBMNT" "8" "05 November 2002" "" ""
|
||||
.SH NAME
|
||||
smbmnt \- helper utility for mounting SMB filesystems
|
||||
.SH SYNOPSIS
|
||||
|
@ -3,7 +3,7 @@
|
||||
.\" <http://shell.ipoline.com/~elmert/comp/docbook2X/>
|
||||
.\" Please send any bug reports, improvements, comments, patches,
|
||||
.\" etc. to Steve Cheng <steve@ggi-project.org>.
|
||||
.TH "SMBMOUNT" "8" "01 October 2002" "" ""
|
||||
.TH "SMBMOUNT" "8" "05 November 2002" "" ""
|
||||
.SH NAME
|
||||
smbmount \- mount an smbfs filesystem
|
||||
.SH SYNOPSIS
|
||||
|
@ -3,7 +3,7 @@
|
||||
.\" <http://shell.ipoline.com/~elmert/comp/docbook2X/>
|
||||
.\" Please send any bug reports, improvements, comments, patches,
|
||||
.\" etc. to Steve Cheng <steve@ggi-project.org>.
|
||||
.TH "SMBPASSWD" "5" "26 November 2002" "" ""
|
||||
.TH "SMBPASSWD" "5" "05 November 2002" "" ""
|
||||
.SH NAME
|
||||
smbpasswd \- The Samba encrypted password file
|
||||
.SH SYNOPSIS
|
||||
|
@ -3,7 +3,7 @@
|
||||
.\" <http://shell.ipoline.com/~elmert/comp/docbook2X/>
|
||||
.\" Please send any bug reports, improvements, comments, patches,
|
||||
.\" etc. to Steve Cheng <steve@ggi-project.org>.
|
||||
.TH "SMBSPOOL" "8" "01 October 2002" "" ""
|
||||
.TH "SMBSPOOL" "8" "05 November 2002" "" ""
|
||||
.SH NAME
|
||||
smbspool \- send a print file to an SMB printer
|
||||
.SH SYNOPSIS
|
||||
|
@ -3,7 +3,7 @@
|
||||
.\" <http://shell.ipoline.com/~elmert/comp/docbook2X/>
|
||||
.\" Please send any bug reports, improvements, comments, patches,
|
||||
.\" etc. to Steve Cheng <steve@ggi-project.org>.
|
||||
.TH "SMBSTATUS" "1" "01 October 2002" "" ""
|
||||
.TH "SMBSTATUS" "1" "05 November 2002" "" ""
|
||||
.SH NAME
|
||||
smbstatus \- report on current Samba connections
|
||||
.SH SYNOPSIS
|
||||
|
@ -3,7 +3,7 @@
|
||||
.\" <http://shell.ipoline.com/~elmert/comp/docbook2X/>
|
||||
.\" Please send any bug reports, improvements, comments, patches,
|
||||
.\" etc. to Steve Cheng <steve@ggi-project.org>.
|
||||
.TH "SMBTAR" "1" "01 October 2002" "" ""
|
||||
.TH "SMBTAR" "1" "05 November 2002" "" ""
|
||||
.SH NAME
|
||||
smbtar \- shell script for backing up SMB/CIFS shares directly to UNIX tape drives
|
||||
.SH SYNOPSIS
|
||||
|
@ -3,7 +3,7 @@
|
||||
.\" <http://shell.ipoline.com/~elmert/comp/docbook2X/>
|
||||
.\" Please send any bug reports, improvements, comments, patches,
|
||||
.\" etc. to Steve Cheng <steve@ggi-project.org>.
|
||||
.TH "SMBUMOUNT" "8" "01 October 2002" "" ""
|
||||
.TH "SMBUMOUNT" "8" "05 November 2002" "" ""
|
||||
.SH NAME
|
||||
smbumount \- smbfs umount for normal users
|
||||
.SH SYNOPSIS
|
||||
|
@ -3,7 +3,7 @@
|
||||
.\" <http://shell.ipoline.com/~elmert/comp/docbook2X/>
|
||||
.\" Please send any bug reports, improvements, comments, patches,
|
||||
.\" etc. to Steve Cheng <steve@ggi-project.org>.
|
||||
.TH "SWAT" "8" "01 October 2002" "" ""
|
||||
.TH "SWAT" "8" "05 November 2002" "" ""
|
||||
.SH NAME
|
||||
swat \- Samba Web Administration Tool
|
||||
.SH SYNOPSIS
|
||||
|
@ -3,7 +3,7 @@
|
||||
.\" <http://shell.ipoline.com/~elmert/comp/docbook2X/>
|
||||
.\" Please send any bug reports, improvements, comments, patches,
|
||||
.\" etc. to Steve Cheng <steve@ggi-project.org>.
|
||||
.TH "TESTPRNS" "1" "01 October 2002" "" ""
|
||||
.TH "TESTPRNS" "1" "05 November 2002" "" ""
|
||||
.SH NAME
|
||||
testprns \- check printer name for validity with smbd
|
||||
.SH SYNOPSIS
|
||||
|
@ -24,6 +24,31 @@ supports cascaded VFS modules.
|
||||
Execute the specified (colon-separated) commands.
|
||||
See below for the commands that are available.
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
\fB-d|--debug=debuglevel\fR
|
||||
\fIdebuglevel\fR is an integer
|
||||
from 0 to 10. The default value if this parameter is
|
||||
not specified is zero.
|
||||
|
||||
The higher this value, the more detail will be
|
||||
logged to the log files about the activities of the
|
||||
server. At level 0, only critical errors and serious
|
||||
warnings will be logged. Level 1 is a reasonable level for
|
||||
day to day running - it generates a small amount of
|
||||
information about operations carried out.
|
||||
|
||||
Levels above 1 will generate considerable
|
||||
amounts of log data, and should only be used when
|
||||
investigating a problem. Levels above 3 are designed for
|
||||
use only by developers and generate HUGE amounts of log
|
||||
data, most of which is extremely cryptic.
|
||||
|
||||
Note that specifying this parameter here will
|
||||
override the log
|
||||
level file.
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
\fB-h|--help\fR
|
||||
Print a summary of command line options.
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
\fB-l|--logfile=logbasename\fR
|
||||
File name for log/debug files. The extension
|
||||
\&'.client' will be appended. The log file is never removed
|
||||
|
@ -3,7 +3,7 @@
|
||||
.\" <http://shell.ipoline.com/~elmert/comp/docbook2X/>
|
||||
.\" Please send any bug reports, improvements, comments, patches,
|
||||
.\" etc. to Steve Cheng <steve@ggi-project.org>.
|
||||
.TH "WBINFO" "1" "26 November 2002" "" ""
|
||||
.TH "WBINFO" "1" "05 November 2002" "" ""
|
||||
.SH NAME
|
||||
wbinfo \- Query information from winbind daemon
|
||||
.SH SYNOPSIS
|
||||
|
Loading…
Reference in New Issue
Block a user